Location via proxy:   [ UP ]  
[Report a bug]   [Manage cookies]                
Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 278

BODY EXTERIOR, DOORS, ROOF & VEHICLE SECURITY

SECTION DLKDOOR & LOCK


B

E
CONTENTS
WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION ..................19 F
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys-
PRECAUTION ............................................... 9 tem Diagram ............................................................20
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : Sys- G
PRECAUTIONS ................................................... 9 tem Description ........................................................20
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN- KEY REMINDER FUNCTION ....................................22
SIONER" ................................................................... 9 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram ....22 H
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover...... 9 KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Descrip-
Work .......................................................................... 9 tion ...........................................................................22
I
PREPARATION ........................................... 10 WARNING FUNCTION ..............................................23
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description ..........23
PREPARATION ..................................................10
Special Service Tools .............................................. 10 BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ..................... 26 J
Commercial Service Tools ...................................... 10 System Diagram ......................................................26
System Description ..................................................26
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ............................. 11
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ........................... 27 DLK
COMPONENT PARTS .......................................11
COMMON ITEM .........................................................27
Component Parts Location .................................... 11
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - L
Component Description .......................................... 12
COMMON ITEM) .....................................................27
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM) ....13
DOOR LOCK ..............................................................28
System Diagram ...................................................... 13 M
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
System Description ................................................. 13
DOOR LOCK) ..........................................................28
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM) ..........15 INTELLIGENT KEY ....................................................29
N
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM ................................... 15 INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM -
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram.... 15 INTELLIGENT KEY) ................................................30
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Descrip-
TRUNK .......................................................................33 O
tion .......................................................................... 15
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) ......33
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION .......................................... 16
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram ......... 16
ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION .............. 34
P
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description .... 16 BCM ................................................................... 34
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION .............................. 18 List of ECU Reference .............................................34
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Dia-
WIRING DIAGRAM ...................................... 35
gram ........................................................................ 18
BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System De- DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ................................. 35
scription ................................................................... 18 Wiring Diagram ........................................................35

Revision: 2011 October DLK-1 2012 JUKE


BASIC INSPECTION ................................... 38 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 63

DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ........ 38 REAR LH ................................................................... 64


Work Flow ............................................................... 38 REAR LH : Component Function Check ............... 64
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 64
DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ......................... 41
REAR RH ................................................................... 65
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 41 REAR RH : Component Function Check ............... 65
DTC Logic ............................................................... 41 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ........................... 66
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 41
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 67
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 43 Component Function Check .................................. 67
DTC Logic ............................................................... 43 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 67
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 43 Component Inspection ............................................ 68

B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA ................................. 45 DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................... 69


DTC Logic ............................................................... 45 Component Function Check .................................. 69
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 45 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 69
Component Inspection ............................................ 70
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 47
DTC Logic ............................................................... 47 DOOR SWITCH ................................................. 71
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 47 Component Function Check .................................. 71
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 71
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 49 Component Inspection ............................................ 72
DTC Logic ............................................................... 49
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 49 HAZARD FUNCTION ........................................ 74
Component Function Check .................................. 74
B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA ............................. 51 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 74
DTC Logic ............................................................... 51
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 51 INTELLIGENT KEY ........................................... 75
Component Function Check .................................. 75
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ................ 53 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 75
Component Function Check ................................. 53
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 53 INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ......... 76
Component Function Check .................................. 76
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ...................... 55 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 76
Component Function Check ................................. 55 Component Inspection ............................................ 77
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 55
Component Inspection ............................................ 56 KEY WARNING LAMP ...................................... 78
Component Function Check .................................. 78
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH .................... 57 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 78
Component Function Check ................................. 57
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 57 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ......... 79
Component Inspection ............................................ 58 Component Function Check .................................. 79
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 79
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER) .................. 59
Component Function Check ................................. 59 SHIFT P WARNING LAMP ................................ 81
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 59 Component Function Check .................................. 81
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 81
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH ...................... 60
Component Function Check ................................... 60 UNLOCK SENSOR ............................................ 82
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................. 60 Component Function Check .................................. 82
Component Inspection ............................................ 61 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 82
Component Inspection ............................................ 83
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR ................................ 62
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 84
DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 62
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check ........ 62 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .................... 62 DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ............. 84
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 63 ALL DOOR ................................................................ 84
PASSENGER SIDE : ALL DOOR : Description ......................................... 84
Component Function Check ................................. 63 ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 84

Revision: 2011 October DLK-2 2012 JUKE


DRIVER SIDE ............................................................ 84 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................95
DRIVER SIDE : Description .................................... 84 A
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..................... 84 VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............... 96
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................... 84 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................96
PASSENGER SIDE : Description ........................... 85 B
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ............ 85 IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE .................. 97
REAR LH ................................................................... 85 Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................97 C
REAR LH : Description ............................................ 85
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 85 P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UN-
LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ....... 98
REAR RH ................................................................... 85 D
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................98
REAR RH : Description ........................................... 85
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ............................ 85 HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH NOT OPERATE ................................................. 99 E
Diagnosis Procedure ...............................................99
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ................................87
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES .......................... 87
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
F
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description.... 87 ERATE ............................................................. 101
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 101
Procedure ................................................................ 87 OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OP- G
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............... 87 ERATE ............................................................. 102
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : De- Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 102
scription ................................................................... 88 H
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diag-
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
nosis Procedure ...................................................... 88 ATE .................................................................. 103
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 103
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ...... 88 I
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE ........ 104
Description .............................................................. 88 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 104
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : J
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPER-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 88
ATE .................................................................. 105
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH ............................ 88 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 105
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description .... 89 DLK
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARN-
Procedure ................................................................ 89 ING DOES NOT OPERATE ............................ 106
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 106 L
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERATION ...............90 DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 90 NOT OPERATE ............................................... 107
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 107 M
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH IN-
TELLIGENT KEY ................................................91 KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE .... 108
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 91 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 108 N

IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION KEY WARNING LAMP DOES NOT ILLUMI-
DOES NOT OPERATE .......................................92 NATE ............................................................... 109
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 109 O
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 92

SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
NOT OPERATE ..................................................93 ERATE ............................................................. 110 P
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 93 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 110

BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ..................94 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................... 94 NOSES ............................................................ 111
Work Flow .............................................................. 111
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT Inspection Procedure ............................................. 113
OPERATE ...........................................................95 Diagnostic Worksheet ............................................ 115

Revision: 2011 October DLK-3 2012 JUKE


REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION .............. 117 BACK DOOR STRIKER .......................................... 142
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa-
HOOD ............................................................... 117 tion ........................................................................ 142
Exploded View .......................................................117
BACK DOOR HINGE .............................................. 142
HOOD ASSEMBLY ..................................................117 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation . 142
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....117
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................118 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................ 143
BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 143
HOOD HINGE ...........................................................119 BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal ............................. 144
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation .............119
HOOD HINGE : Adjustment ..................................120 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 144
BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ............................................121 Installation ............................................................. 144
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa-
tion .........................................................................122 HOOD LOCK .................................................... 146
Exploded View ...................................................... 146
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 123
Exploded View .......................................................123 HOOD LOCK ........................................................... 146
Removal and Installation .......................................123 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 146

FRONT FENDER ............................................. 126 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 147
Exploded View .......................................................126 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
Removal and Installation .......................................126 Installation ............................................................. 147
Inspection .............................................................. 147
FRONT DOOR ................................................. 128
Exploded View .......................................................128 FRONT DOOR LOCK ....................................... 149
Exploded View ...................................................... 149
DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................128
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....128 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 149
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................130 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 149

DOOR STRIKER ......................................................131 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 150


DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........131 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 150

DOOR HINGE ...........................................................131 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 150


DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............131 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 150

DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................132 REAR DOOR LOCK ......................................... 153


DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..132 Exploded View ...................................................... 153

REAR DOOR ................................................... 133 DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 153


Exploded View .......................................................133 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 153

DOOR ASSEMBLY ..................................................133 INSIDE HANDLE ..................................................... 154


DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation .....133 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ........ 154
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ..........................135 OUTSIDE HANDLE ................................................. 154
DOOR STRIKER ......................................................136 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation .... 154
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation .........136 BACK DOOR LOCK ......................................... 156
DOOR HINGE ...........................................................136 Exploded View ...................................................... 156
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .............136
DOOR LOCK ........................................................... 156
DOOR CHECK LINK ................................................137 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation .............. 156
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation ..137 EMERGENCY LEVER ............................................. 156
BACK DOOR ................................................... 138 EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures ......... 156
Exploded View .......................................................138 FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ............................ 158
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY .......................................138 Exploded View ...................................................... 158
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa- FUEL FILLER LID ................................................... 158
tion .........................................................................138
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation ....... 158
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................141

Revision: 2011 October DLK-4 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE ............................. 159 Component Parts Location .................................. 170
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Component Description ........................................ 170 A
Installation ............................................................. 159
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .................... 172
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK ........................................ 159 System Diagram .................................................... 172
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- System Description ................................................ 172 B
tion ........................................................................ 160
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM ........... 174
DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 161 System Diagram .................................................... 174 C
Exploded View ...................................................... 161 System Description ................................................ 174
Removal and Installation ....................................... 161
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM ................... 176
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA ................................... 162 System Diagram .................................................... 176 D
System Description ................................................ 176
INSTRUMENT CENTER .......................................... 162
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installa- DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM) ......................... 177 E
tion ........................................................................ 162
COMMON ITEM ....................................................... 177
CONSOLE ............................................................... 162 COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM -
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation .................. 162 COMMON ITEM) ................................................... 177 F
LUGGAGE ROOM ................................................... 162 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 177
LUGGAGE ROOM : Exploded View ..................... 163 DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM -
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation ...... 163 DOOR LOCK) ........................................................ 177 G

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA ............................... 164 MULTI REMOTE ENT .............................................. 179
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function H
DRIVER SIDE .......................................................... 164 (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT) .............................. 179
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation ............. 164
TRUNK ..................................................................... 180
PASSENGER SIDE ................................................. 164 TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) .... 180 I
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation .... 164

REAR BUMPER ...................................................... 164


ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION ............ 181
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation ......... 164 BCM ................................................................. 181 J

INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER ........ 165 List of ECU Reference ........................................... 181
Removal and Installation ....................................... 165 WIRING DIAGRAM .................................... 182 DLK
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ........ 166 DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM ............................... 182
Removal and Installation ....................................... 166
Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 182
L
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY ........................ 167
BASIC INSPECTION ................................. 184
Removal and Installation ....................................... 167
WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW ..... 184 M
Work Flow .............................................................. 184
PRECAUTION ............................................ 168
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION ......................... 187
PRECAUTIONS ................................................ 168 Description ............................................................. 187 N
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System Work Procedure ..................................................... 187
(SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TEN-
SIONER" ............................................................... 168 DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS ....................... 189 O
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover.. 168
Work ...................................................................... 168 BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR ............. 189
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 189
PREPARATION ......................................... 169 P
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH ................... 190
PREPARATION ................................................ 169 Component Function Check ................................ 190
Special Service Tools ............................................ 169 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 190
Commercial Service Tools .................................... 169 Component Inspection ........................................... 191

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ........................... 170 DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH ................... 192
Component Function Check .................................. 192
COMPONENT PARTS ..................................... 170

Revision: 2011 October DLK-5 2012 JUKE


Diagnosis Procedure .............................................192 PASSENGER SIDE : Description ......................... 212
Component Inspection ...........................................193 PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure .......... 212

DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR .............................. 194 REAR LH ................................................................. 212


REAR LH : Description ......................................... 212
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................194 REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure .......................... 212
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check .......194
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................194 REAR RH ................................................................. 212
REAR RH : Description ......................................... 212
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................195 REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ......................... 212
PASSENGER SIDE :
Component Function Check ................................195 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ..........195 DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERATION ............. 214
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 214
REAR LH ..................................................................196
REAR LH : Component Function Check ..............196 DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure ...........................196 KEYFOB ........................................................... 215
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 215
REAR RH .................................................................197
REAR RH : Component Function Check .............197 BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED ................ 216
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure ..........................198 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 216
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 199 SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES
Component Function Check ................................199 NOT OPERATE ................................................ 217
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................199
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 217
Component Inspection ...........................................200
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK
DOOR SWITCH ............................................... 201
OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE ............... 218
Component Function Check ................................201
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 218
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................201
Component Inspection ...........................................202 IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD FUNCTION ....................................... 204 FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 219
Component Function Check ................................204 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 219
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................204 P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UN-
KEY SWITCH ................................................... 205 LOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ...... 220
Component Function Check ..................................205 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 220
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................205 AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT
Component Inspection ...........................................206
OPERATE ......................................................... 221
KEYFOB BATTERY ........................................ 207 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 221
Component Function Check ................................207
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................207
ERATE .............................................................. 222
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ........ 208 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 222
Component Function Check ................................208
Diagnosis Procedure .............................................208
KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK
FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE ................. 223
SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS ............................ 211 Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 223

DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH ........... 211 ERATE .............................................................. 224
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 224
ALL DOOR ...............................................................211
ALL DOOR : Description .......................................211 HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure ........................211 NOT OPERATE ................................................ 225
Diagnosis Procedure ............................................. 225
DRIVER SIDE ...........................................................211
DRIVER SIDE : Description ...................................211 SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAG-
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure ...................211 NOSES .............................................................. 226
Work Flow ............................................................. 226
PASSENGER SIDE ..................................................211
Inspection Procedure ............................................ 228

Revision: 2011 October DLK-6 2012 JUKE


Diagnostic Worksheet ........................................... 230 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installa-
tion ......................................................................... 253 A
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ............. 232 BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment ................ 256
HOOD ............................................................... 232 BACK DOOR STRIKER ........................................... 257
Exploded View ...................................................... 232 BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installa- B
tion ......................................................................... 257
HOOD ASSEMBLY ................................................. 232
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 232 BACK DOOR HINGE ............................................... 257 C
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 233 BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation .. 257
HOOD HINGE .......................................................... 234 BACK DOOR STAY ................................................. 258
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 234 BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation .... 258 D
HOOD HINGE : Adjustment .................................. 235 BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal .............................. 259
HOOD SUPPORT ROD ........................................... 236 BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP ............................ 259
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installa- BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and E
tion ........................................................................ 237 Installation ............................................................. 259
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT ......................... 238 HOOD LOCK ................................................... 261 F
Exploded View ...................................................... 238 Exploded View ....................................................... 261
Removal and Installation ....................................... 238
HOOD LOCK ............................................................ 261
FRONT FENDER .............................................. 241 HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 261 G
Exploded View ...................................................... 241
Removal and Installation ....................................... 241 HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE ........................... 262
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and
H
FRONT DOOR .................................................. 243 Installation ............................................................. 262
Exploded View ...................................................... 243 Inspection .............................................................. 262

DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 243 FRONT DOOR LOCK ..................................... 264 I


DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 243 Exploded View ....................................................... 264
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 245
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 264
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 246 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 264 J
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 246
INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 265
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 246 INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 265 DLK
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 246
OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 265
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 247 OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 265
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 247 L
REAR DOOR LOCK ........................................ 268
REAR DOOR .................................................... 248 Exploded View ....................................................... 268
Exploded View ...................................................... 248
DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 268 M
DOOR ASSEMBLY ................................................. 248 DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 268
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation ..... 248
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment .......................... 250 INSIDE HANDLE ...................................................... 269
N
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ......... 269
DOOR STRIKER ...................................................... 251
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation ........ 251 OUTSIDE HANDLE .................................................. 269
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation ..... 269 O
DOOR HINGE .......................................................... 251
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation ............. 251 BACK DOOR LOCK ....................................... 271
Exploded View ....................................................... 271
DOOR CHECK LINK ............................................... 252 P
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation .. 252 DOOR LOCK ............................................................ 271
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation ............... 271
BACK DOOR .................................................... 138
Exploded View ...................................................... 253 EMERGENCY LEVER ............................................. 271
EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures .......... 271
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY ...................................... 253
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER ........................... 273
Exploded View ....................................................... 273

Revision: 2011 October DLK-7 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID ....................................................273 DOOR SWITCH ................................................ 276
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation .......273 Exploded View ...................................................... 276
Removal and Installation ....................................... 276
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE .............................274
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER ........ 277
Installation .............................................................274 Removal and Installation ....................................... 277
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK .........................................274 KEYFOB BATTERY ......................................... 278
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installa- Exploded View ...................................................... 278
tion .........................................................................275 Removal and Installation ....................................... 278

Revision: 2011 October DLK-8 2012 JUKE


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION A
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT B
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007578774

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along C
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. D
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING: E
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
F
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”. G
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors. H
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation. I
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing J
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
DLK
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007578775

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
L
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J
O
Work INFOID:0000000007578776

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their P
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-9 2012 JUKE


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PREPARATION
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007578777

The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

(J-39570)
Locates the noise
Chassis ear

SIIA0993E

(J-43980)
NISSAN Squeak and Rat- Repairs the cause of noise
tle Kit

SIIA0994E

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007578778

Tool name Description

Engine ear Locates the noise

SIIA0995E

Remover tool Removes the clips, pawls, and metal clips

JMKIA3050ZZ

Power tool

PIIB1407E

Revision: 2011 October DLK-10 2012 JUKE


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007578779
B

DLK

JMKIA6158ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-11 2012 JUKE


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

1. Intelligent Key warning buzzer 2. Remote keyless entry receiver 3. Inside key antenna (instrument cen-
ter)
4. TCM 5. Push-button ignition switch 6. Combination meter
Refer to TM-69, "CVT CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
7. BCM 8. Power window main switch 9. Outside key antenna (driver side)
Refer to BCS-6, "BODY CONTROL
SYSTEM : Component Parts Location"
10. Front door switch (driver side) 11. Front door lock assembly (driver side) 12. Front door request switch (driver side)
13. Inside key antenna (console) 14. Inside key antenna (luggage room) 15. Back door request switch
16. Back door lock assembly 17. Outside antenna (rear bumper) 18. Front door request switch (passenger
side)
19. Outside key antenna (passenger side) 20. IPDM E/R
Refer to PCS-5, "Component Parts
Location"
A. View with front bumper removed B. View with instrument panel assembly C. View with multi display unit removed
removed
D. View with center console assembly re- E. View with luggage room finisher re- F. View with rear bumper removed
moved moved

Component Description INFOID:0000000007578780

Item Function
BCM Controls the door lock system.
Back door opener actuator Opens the back door with the back door open signal from BCM.
Back door opener switch Inputs back door opener switch operation signal to BCM.
• Displays each operation method guide and warning for system malfunction.
Combination meter • Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.
• Transmits vehicle seep signal to CAN communication line.
• Inputs locks/unlocks signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
Door lock actuator
• Integrated in each door lock assembly.
• Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Door lock and unlock switch
• Integrated in the power window main switch and front power window switch (passenger side).
• Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Door request switch
• Integrated in the outside handle (driver side, passenger side and back door).
Door switch Detects door open/close condition.
• Detects whether Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
Inside key antenna
• Installed in the instrument center and luggage room.
The following functions are available when having and carrying electronic ID.
• Door lock/unlock
Intelligent Key
• Engine start
• Remote control entry function is available when operating on button.
Intelligent Key warning buzzer Warns for an inappropriate operation.
IPDM E/R Sounds horn via CAN communication between BCM.
• Detects whether Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
Outside key antenna
• Integrated in the outside handle (driver side, passenger side and back door).
• BCM transmits the change in the power supply position with the push-button ignition switch to
IPDM E/R via CAN communication line. IPDM E/R transmits the power supply position status
Push-button ignition switch
via CAN communication line to BCM.
• Immobilizer antenna amp checks Intelligent Key transponder.
Remote keyless entry receiver Receives Intelligent Key operation and transmits to BCM.
TCM Transmits shift position signal to BCM via CAN communication line

Revision: 2011 October DLK-12 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
A
System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578781

JMKIA6117GB F

System Description INFOID:0000000007578782

G
DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
Door Lock and Unlock Switch
H
• The door lock and unlock switch (driver side) is build into power window main switch.
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors actu- I
ator are unlocked.
Door Key Cylinder Switch
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to lock position, locks door J
lock actuator of all doors.
• With the mechanical key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to unlock position once
unlocks the driver side door, turning it to unlock position again within 5 seconds after the first unlock opera- DLK
tion unlocks all of the other doors actuator. (SELECTIVE UNLOCK OPERATION)
Selective unlock operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
L
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION
When door lock and unlock switch are operated while driver side door is open and ignition position is ACC or
ON, door locks once but immediately unlocks. M
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock /unlock state, refer to INL-6, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description". N
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (LOCK OPERATION)
The interlock door lock function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion. It has 2 types as per the following items. O
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all P
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
P Range Interlock Door Lock*
All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from the P position to any position other than P.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the shift signal received from the TCM via CAN communication is shifted from the P position to any
position other than P.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-13 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The lock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
NOTE:
P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not
operate.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock function and the type selection of the automatic door lock/
unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON.
4. The switching complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (UNLOCK OPERATION)
The automatic door lock/unlock function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position or
shift position. It has 2 types as per the following items.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock*1
All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the power supply position is
changed from ignition switch ON to OFF.
P Range Interlock Door Unlock*2
All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift signal received from TCM via CAN communication is shifted from any position other than
the P to P position.
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The unlock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
NOTE:
P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not
operate.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock/unlock function and the type selection of the automatic door
lock/unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT. Refer to DLK-28,
"DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors below (door switch OFF)
2. Ignition switch: OFF→ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is complete when the hazard lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink

*1: This function is set to ON before delivery.


*2: This function does not operate on M/T models.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-14 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
A
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578783
B

DLK

L
JMKIA6118GB

INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM : System Description INFOID:0000000007578784 M

• The Intelligent Key system is a system that makes it possible to lock and unlock the door locks (door lock/
unlock function) by carrying the Intelligent Key, which operates based on the results of electronic ID verifica-
tion using two-way communication between the Intelligent Key and the vehicle (BCM). N
CAUTION:
The driver should always carry the Intelligent Key
• The settings for each function can be changed with CONSULT. O
• If an Intelligent Key is lost, a new Intelligent Key can be registered. A maximum of 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered.
• It is possible to perform a diagnosis on the system and register an Intelligent Key with CONSULT.
P
Function Description Refer
Door lock Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the request switch DLK-16
Lock/unlock can be performed by pressing the remote controller button of the In-
Remote keyless entry DLK-20
telligent Key
The key reminder buzzer sounds a warning if the door is locked with the key left
Key reminder DLK-22
inside the vehicle

Revision: 2011 October DLK-15 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Function Description Refer
If an action that does not meet the operating condition of the Intelligent Key sys-
Warning DLK-23
tem is taken, the buzzer sounds to inform the driver
Engine start The engine can be turned on while carrying the Intelligent Key SEC-12
Interior room lamp control Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state INL-6
Panic alarm When Intelligent Key panic alarm button is pressed, horn sounds SEC-18

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION


DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578785

JMKIA6137GB

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007578786

When pressing the door request switch, it is possible to lock and unlock the door by carrying the Intelligent
Key.
OPERATION DESCRIPTION
• When the BCM detects that each door request switch is pressed, it activates the outside key antenna and
inside key antenna corresponding to the pressed door request switch and transmits the request signal to the
Intelligent Key. And then, check that the Intelligent Key is near the door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM transmits door lock/unlock signal and operates each door lock actuator. At the same time, BCM blinks
hazard warning lamp (lock: 2 times, unlock: 1 time) and sounds Intelligent Key buzzer (lock: 2 times, unlock:
1 time) as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the door request switch is
operated.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-16 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Each door request switch operation Operation condition A


• All doors are closed
• Panic alarm is not activated
Lock • P position warning is not activated
B
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area
• All doors are closed
• Panic alarm is not activated C
Unlock
• Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area *
*: Even with a registered Intelligent Key remaining inside the vehicle, door locks can be unlocked from outside of the vehicle with a spare D
Intelligent Key as long as key IDs are different.

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA


The outside key antenna detection area of door lock/unlock function E
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
driver, passenger door handles (1) and back door handle (2). How-
ever, this operating range depends on the ambient conditions. F

JMKIA5569ZZ
H

SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION


Lock Operation I
When an LOCK signal is sent from door request switch (driver side, passenger side or back door), all doors
are locked.
Unlock Operation J
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (driver side) is transmitted, driver side door
unlocks. When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 60 seconds, all door unlocks.
• When an UNLOCK signal from front door request switch (passenger side) is transmitted, passenger side DLK
door unlocks. When another UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 60 seconds, all door unlocks.
• When an UNLOCK signal from back door request switch is transmitted, back door unlocks. When another
UNLOCK signal is transmitted within 60 seconds, all door unlocks.
L
How to Change Selective Unlock Operation Mode
Selective unlock operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
M
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER FUNCTION
During lock, unlock, operation by each request switch, the hazard warning lamps and Intelligent Key warning
buzzer will blink or honk as a reminder. N
When doors are locked, unlocked by each request switch, BCM honks Intelligent Key warning buzzer as a
reminder and blinks.
Operating Function of Hazard and Buzzer Reminder O

Operation Hazard warning lamp blinks Intelligent Key warning buzzer honk
Unlock Once Once P
Lock Twice Twice
Hazard and buzzer reminder does not operate if ignition switch ON position.
How to Change Hazard and Buzzer Reminder Operation Mode
Hazard and buzzer reminder operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION

Revision: 2011 October DLK-17 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
After door is unlocked by door request switch operation and if 60 seconds or more passes without performing
the following operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not acti-
vate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


Operating condition • Door is locked
• Push switch is pressed

How To Change Auto Door Lock Operation Mode


Auto door lock operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Remote keyless entry receiver

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system

Push-button ignition switch


Hazard warning lamp
Outside key antenna
Door request switch

Combination meter
Inside key antenna
Door lock actuator
Door lock function
Intelligent Key

Door switch

BCM
Door lock/unlock function × × × × × × × ×
Hazard and buzzer reminder function × × × × ×
Selective unlock function × × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × ×

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION


BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578787

JMKIA6136GB

BACK DOOR OPEN FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007578788

While back door open in the permitted state, back door opens when back door opener switch is pressed after
back door opener request switch is operated.
BACK DOOR OPEN

Revision: 2011 October DLK-18 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• When the BCM detects that back door opener switch is pressed, it starts the outside key antenna (rear
bumper) and inside key antenna and transmits the request signal to the Intelligent Key. Then, check that the A
Intelligent Key is near the back door.
• If the Intelligent Key is within the outside key antenna detection area, it receives the request signal and
transmits the key ID signal to the BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
B
• BCM receives the key ID signal and compares it with the registered key ID.
• BCM opens back door, simultaneously unlocks all doors.
NOTE:
In selective unlock mode, only back door opens. All doors do not unlock. C
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, the back door can be opened.
D
Back door open function Operation condition
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
• 3 seconds or more after BCM outputs all doors lock signal E
Back door open operation
• Intelligent Key is outside of vehicle
• Intelligent Key is within outside key antenna detection area

OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA DETECTION AREA F


The outside key antenna detection area of back door open function
is in the range of approximately 80 cm (31.50 in) surrounding the
back door opener switch (1). However, this operating range depends G
on the ambient conditions.

I
JMKIA5804ZZ

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS J


Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.
Remote keyless entry receiver

CAN communication system DLK


Back door opener actuator

Back door opener switch


Outside key antenna

Combination meter
Inside key antenna

L
Door lock actuator

Door lock function


Intelligent Key

M
BCM

Back door open function × × × × × × × × × × N


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
O

Revision: 2011 October DLK-19 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578789

JMKIA6159GB

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007578790

The Intelligent Key has the same functions as the remote control entry system. Therefore, it can be used in the
same manner as the remote controller by operating the door lock/unlock button.
OPERATION
Remote keyless entry system controls operation of the following items.
• Door lock/unlock
• Selective unlock function
• Hazard reminder function
• Auto door lock
OPERATION AREA
To check that the Intelligent Key works normally, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each doors, however the opera-
ble range may differ according to surroundings.
DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When door lock/unlock button of the Intelligent Key is pressed, lock signal or unlock signal transmitted from
Intelligent Key to BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• BCM receives the signal and compares it with the registered key ID to the vehicle.
• When BCM receives the door lock/unlock signal, it operates all door lock actuators and the hazard lamp
(lock: 2 times, unlock: 1 time) and horn chirp signal to IPDM E/R at the same time as a reminder.
• IPDM E/R honks horn (lock: 1 times) as a reminder
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following condition are satisfied, remote keyless entry operation is performed when the Intelligent Key is
operated.

Remote controller operation Operation condition


• Panic alarm is not activated
Lock
• P position warning is not activated
Unlock Panic alarm is not activated

SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION


• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key, all doors are locked.
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from Intelligent Key again within 60 seconds, all other doors are
unlocked.
How To Change Selective Unlock Operation Mode
Selective unlock operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-20 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
A
HAZARD AND HORN REMINDER FUNCTION
When doors are locked or unlocked by Intelligent Key, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder and
transmits horn chirp signal to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R sounds horn as a reminder.
The hazard and horn reminder has a horn chirp mode (C mode) and a non-horn chirp mode (S mode). B
Operating Function of Hazard and Horn Reminder

C mode S mode C
Back door Back door
Intelligent Key operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock
open open
D
Hazard warning lamp blinks Twice Once — Twice — —
Horn sound Once — — — — —
Hazard and horn reminder does not operate if ignition switch ON position. E
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode
With CONSULT
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". F
Without CONSULT
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the Intelligent Key for more than 2 seconds at the same time,
the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp blinks and horn sounds as per the G
following items:

J
JMKIA6362GB

AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION


After door is unlocked by Intelligent Key button operation and if 60 seconds or more passes without performing DLK
the following operation, all doors are locked. However, operation check function does not activate.

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


L
Operating condition • Door is locked
• Push switch is pressed

How To Change Auto Door Lock Operation Mode M


Auto door lock operation mode can be changed using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS N
Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-21 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system


Push-button ignition switch

Hazard warning lamp


Combination meter
Door lock actuator
Intelligent Key

Door switch

IPDM E/R
BCM

Horn
Remote keyless entry functions

Door lock/unlock function × × × × ×


Hazard and horn reminder function × × × × × × × ×
Selective unlock function × × × × ×
Auto door lock function × × × × ×

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578791

JMKIA5390GB

KEY REMINDER FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007578792

Key reminder is the function that prevents the key from being left in the vehicle.
Key reminder has the following 3 functions.

Key remainder func-


Operation condition Operation
tion
Right after driver side door is closed under the following conditions
Driver side door • Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
All doors unlock
closed* • Driver side door is opened
• Driver side door is in unlock state
Right after all doors are closed under the following conditions
• All doors unlock
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Door is open to closed • Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• Any door is opened
ing buzzer
• All doors are locked.
• All doors unlock
Right after back door is closed under the following conditions
• Back door can open with
• Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle
Back door is closed back door opener switch
• All doors (except back door) are closed
• Honk Intelligent Key warn-
• All doors (except back door) are locked
ing buzzer

Revision: 2011 October DLK-22 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
*:If the door closing impact shocks the door lock knob, or contacts against baggage with the door lock knob might activate the door locks
accidentally but unlock operation is perform in these cases. A
CAUTION:
• The above function operates when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. However, there may be
times when the Intelligent Key cannot be detected, and this function does not operate when the Intel-
ligent Key is on the instrument panel, rear parcel shelf, or in the glove box. Also, this system some- B
times does not operate if the Intelligent Key is in the door pocket for the open door.
WARNING FUNCTION
C
WARNING FUNCTION : System Description INFOID:0000000007578793

OPERATION DESCRIPTION D
The warning function are as per the following items and are given to the user as warning information and
warnings using combinations of Intelligent Key warning buzzer, combination meter buzzer, KEY warning lamp,
shift P warning lamp and engine start operation indicator lamp. E
• Intelligent Key system malfunction
• OFF position warning
• P position warning
• ACC warning F
• Take away warning
• Door lock operation warning
• Engine start information G
• Intelligent Key low battery warning
• Key ID warning
OPERATION CONDITION H
Operation condition of warning and information is as per the following table.

Warning/Information functions Operation procedure


I
Intelligent Key system malfunction A malfunction is detected on BCM and key warning lamp turns ON
When condition A, B or condition C is satisfied
• Condition A J
- Ignition switch: ACC position
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
• Condition B
For internal - Turn ignition switch from ON to OFF while door is open DLK
• Condition C
- Intelligent Key backside is contacted to ignition switch while brake pedal is de-
OFF position warning pressed and ignition switch is LOCK or OFF (When the Intelligent Key battery
is discharged) L
- Door switch (driver side): ON (Door is open)
OFF position warning (For internal) is in active mode, driver side door is closed
NOTE: M
For external* OFF position warning (for external) operates only when driver door is closed af-
ter each of P position warning, ACC warning, and OFF position warning (inter-
nal) sounds.
N
• Shift position: Except P position
For internal
• Engine is running to stopped (Ignition switch is ON to OFF)
P position warning* • P position warning (For internal) operates
For external • Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close) O
• Intelligent Key cannot be detected inside the vehicle
• After P position warning operates, or when ignition switch is turned ON imme-
ACC warning* diately after P position warning operates P
• Ignition switch: ACC position

Revision: 2011 October DLK-23 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Warning/Information functions Operation procedure
• Ignition switch: Except LOCK position
Door status changes
• Door switch: ON to OFF (Door is open to close)
from open to close
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
• Door switch: ON (Door is open)
Take away warning Door status is open • Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle during Key ID ver-
ification for 5 seconds
• Ignition switch: Except LOCK position
Push button-ignition
• Press push-button ignition switch
switch operation
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
When door lock operation is requested while door lock operating condition of
Door lock operation warning
door request switch not satisfied
• Ignition switch: ON position
Ignition switch is ON po-
• Shift position: P position*
sition
• Engine is stopped
Engine start information
• Ignition switch: Except ON position
Ignition switch is except
• Shift position: P position*
ON position
• Intelligent Key can be detected inside the vehicle
Intelligent Key low battery warning BCM detects that Intelligent Key is low battery, after ignition switch is turned ON
• Push-button ignition switch is pressed
Key ID warning
• Registered Intelligent Key is not detected inside the vehicle
*: M/T models do not apply.

WARNING METHOD
The following table shows the alarm or warning methods with chime.

Warning chime
Shift P Engine start
“KEY” warn- Intelligent
Warning/Information functions warning Combination operation in-
ing lamp Key warning
lamp meter buzzer dicator lamp
buzzer
Intelligent Key system malfunction Indicate — — — —
For internal — — Activate — —
OFF position warning
For external* — — — Activate —
For internal Indicate Activate — —
P position warning* Blink (yellow)
For external — — Active —
ACC warning* — — Activate — —
Door is open to close — Activate Activate —
Door is open — — — —
Take away warning Blink (yellow)
Push-ignition switch opera-
— Activate — —
tion
Door lock operation warning — — — Activate —
Key ID warning Blink (yellow) — — — —
Engine start information — — — — Indicate
Intelligent Key low battery warning Blink (green) — — — —
*: M/T models do not apply.

LIST OF OPERATION RELATED PARTS


Parts marked with × are the parts related to operation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-24 2012 JUKE


SYSTEM (INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Engine start operation indicator lamp


A

Combination meter warning buzzer


Intelligent Key warning buzzer

CAN communication system


B

Outside key antenna

Shift P warning lamp


Warning function

“KEY” warning lamp


Door request switch

Inside key antenna


C

Intelligent Key

Ignition switch

Door switch

BCM
D

Intelligent Key system malfunction × × ×


For internal × × × × E
OFF position warning
For external × × ×
P position warning × × × × × ×
F
ACC warning × × × ×
Door is open or close × × × × × × × ×
Door is open × × × × × × G
Take away warning
Push-button ignition switch opera-
× × × × × × ×
tion
Door lock operation warning × × × × × × × H
Key ID warning × × × × ×
Engine start information × × × × × ×
I
Steering lock information × × ×
Intelligent Key low battery warning × × × × ×
J

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-25 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578794

JMKIA6011GB

System Description INFOID:0000000007578795

BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION


When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM operates back door opener actuator.
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, back door opener operation is performed.

Back door opener switch operation Operation condition


• When back door is unlocked using back door opener request switch (selective unlock
Back door open mode), or after BCM outputs all doors unlock signal
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
NOTE:
• When battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected during all doors unlock state, back door may not
open.
• Regardless of door lock actuator state, BCM resets recognition of all doors unlock state approximately 30
seconds after battery terminal is disconnected and BCM recognizes that all doors are in lock state.
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are
in unlock state.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-26 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007812893
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Interior room lamp timer INT LAMP × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
DLK
Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×
Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × ×
Air conditioning system AIR CONDITONER × ×* L
• Intelligent Key system
INTELLIGENT KEY × × ×
• Engine start system
Combination switch COMB SW × M
Body control system BCM ×
NVIS - NATS IMMU × × ×
N
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
Back door open TRUNK ×
Theft warning alarm THEFT ALM × × × O
RAP RETAINED PWR ×
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
TPMS AIR PRESSURE MONITOR × × ×
P

NOTE:
*: For models with automatic A/C, this diagnosis mode is not used.

FREEZE FRAME DATA (FFD)


The BCM records the following vehicle condition at the time a particular DTC is detected, and displays on
CONSULT.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-27 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

CONSULT screen item Indication/Unit Description


Vehicle Speed km/h Vehicle speed of the moment a particular DTC is detected
Odo/Trip Meter km Total mileage (Odometer value) of the moment a particular DTC is detected
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
SLEEP>LOCK
normal mode (Power position is “LOCK”*.)
While turning BCM status from low power consumption mode to
SLEEP>OFF
normal mode (Power position is “OFF”.)
LOCK>ACC While turning power position from “LOCK”* *to “ACC”
ACC>ON While turning power position from “ACC” to “IGN”
While turning power position from “RUN” to “ACC” (Vehicle is
RUN>ACC
stopping and selector lever is except P position.)
While turning power position from “CRANKING” to “RUN” (From
CRANK>RUN
cranking up the engine to run it)
While turning power position from “RUN“ to “ACC” (Emergency
RUN>URGENT
stop operation)
ACC>OFF While turning power position from “ACC” to “OFF”
Power position status of
Vehicle Condition OFF>LOCK the moment a particular While turning power position from “OFF” to “LOCK”*
DTC is detected
OFF>ACC While turning power position from “OFF” to “ACC”
ON>CRANK While turning power position from “IGN” to “CRANKING”
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power position is
OFF>SLEEP
“OFF”.) to low power consumption mode
While turning BCM status from normal mode (Power position is
LOCK>SLEEP
“LOCK”*.) to low power consumption mode
LOCK Power position is “LOCK”*
OFF Power position is “OFF” (Ignition switch OFF)
ACC Power position is “ACC” (Ignition switch ACC)
ON Power position is “IGN” (Ignition switch ON with engine stopped)
ENGINE RUN Power position is “RUN” (Ignition switch ON with engine running)
CRANKING Power position is “CRANKING” (At engine cranking)
The number of times that ignition switch is turned ON after DTC is detected
• The number is 0 when a malfunction is detected now.
IGN Counter 0 - 39 • The number increases like 1 → 2 → 3...38 → 39 after returning to the normal condition
whenever ignition switch OFF → ON.
• The number is fixed to 39 until the self-diagnosis results are erased if it is over 39.
NOTE:
*: Power position shifts to “LOCK” from “OFF”, when ignition switch is in the OFF position, selector lever is in the P position (A/T models
and CVT models), and any of the following conditions are met.
• Closing door
• Opening door
• Door is locked using door request switch
• Door is locked using Intelligent Key
The power position shifts to “ACC” when the push-button ignition switch (push switch) is pushed at “LOCK”.
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000007578797

BCM CONSULT FUNCTION


CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
WORK SUPPORT

Revision: 2011 October DLK-28 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Monitor item Description A


Anti-hijack function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
B
Automatic door lock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SE- • VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 24km/h (15MPH)
LECT • P RANGE*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other than
the P position C
Automatic door unlock function mode can be selected from the following in the mode
• MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF
• MODE 2*: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than D
the P to P position
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK • MODE 3: Driver side door is unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to
SELECT OFF
• MODE 4*: Driver side door is unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other E
than the P to P position
• MODE 5: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• MODE 6: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
F
Automatic door lock/unlock function mode can be selected from the following in this mode
• Off: Non-operational
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
SET
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only G
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
*: P range interlock door lock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not operate.
H
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item Contents


I
REQ SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
REQ SW-BD/TR Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door request switch J
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DLK
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
DOOR SW-BK Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch L
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder M
KEY CYL UN-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder

ACTIVE TEST N

Test item Description


This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation O
• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LOCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
DOOR LOCK P
touched
• The door lock actuator (passenger side) is unlocked when “AS UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
touched
• The door lock actuator (other) is unlocked when “OTR ULK” on CONSULT screen is touched

INTELLIGENT KEY

Revision: 2011 October DLK-29 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY) INFOID:0000000007578798

WORK SUPPORT

Monitor item Description


INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS This function allows inside key antenna self-diagnosis
Door lock/unlock function by door request switch mode can be changed to operation in this
mode
LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Engine start function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ENGINE START BY I-KEY • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
NOTE:
TRUNK/GLASS HATCH OPEN
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Horn reminder function mode by Intelligent Key button can be changed to operate (ON) or not
operate (OFF) with this mode
HORN WITH KEYLESS LOCK
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Panic alarm button pressing time on Intelligent Key remote control button can be selected from
the following with this mode
PANIC ALARM SET • MODE 1: 0.5 sec
• MODE 2: Non-operation
• MODE 3: 1.5 sec
NOTE:
TRUNK OPEN DELAY
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
Intelligent Key low battery warning mode can be changed to operation with this mode
LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Key reminder function mode can be changed to operation with this mode
ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Hazard reminder function mode by door request switch and Intelligent Key button can be se-
lected from the following with this mode
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
HAZARD ANSWER BACK
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Lock and unlock operation
• Off: Non-operation
Buzzer reminder function (lock operation) mode by door request switch can be selected from
the following with this mode
ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK • Horn Chirp: Sound horn
• Buzzer: Sound Intelligent Key warning buzzer
• Off: Non-operation
Buzzer reminder function (unlock operation) mode by door request switch can be changed to
operation with this mode
ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK
• On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Starter motor can operate during the times below
• 70 msec
SHORT CRANKING OUTPUT
• 100 msec
• 200 msec

Revision: 2011 October DLK-30 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor item Description
A
CONFIRM KEY FOB ID It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode
Auto door lock operation time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: OFF
• MODE 2: 30 sec B
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minutes
• MODE 5: 3 minutes
• MODE 6: 4 minutes
C
• MODE 7: 5 minutes

SELF-DIAG RESULT D
Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index".
DATA MONITOR
E
Monitor Item Condition
REQ SW -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (driver side)
REQ SW -AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of door request switch (passenger side)
F
REQ SW -BD/TR Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door request switch
PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
G
CLUTCH SW*1 Indicates [On/Off] condition of clutch interlock switch

BRAKE SW 1 Indicates [On/Off]*2 condition of stop lamp switch power supply


H
BRAKE SW 2 Indicates [On/Off] condition of stop lamp switch
DETE/CANCL SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN/N SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position I
UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of driver door UNLOCK status
PUSH SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of push-button ignition switch
J
IGN RLY1 -F/B Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition relay 1
DETE SW -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT PN -IPDM Indicates [On/Off] condition of P or N position DLK
SFT P -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of P position
SFT N -MET Indicates [On/Off] condition of N position
ENGINE STATE Indicates [Stop/Stall/Crank/Run] condition of engine states L
NOTE:
S/L LOCK-IPDM
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
M
NOTE:
S/L UNLK-IPDM
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
S/L RELAY-REQ N
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
VEH SPEED 1 Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numerical value [Km/h]
VEH SPEED 2 Display the vehicle speed signal received from ABS or VDC or TCM by numerical value [Km/h]
O
DOOR STAT-DR Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of driver side door status
DOOR STAT-AS Indicates [LOCK/READY/UNLK] condition of passenger side door status
ID OK FLAG Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of key ID P
PRMT ENG STRT Indicates [Set/Reset] condition of engine start possibility
NOTE:
PRMT RKE STRT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
NOTE:
TRNK/HAT MNTR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of LOCK signal from Intelligent Key

Revision: 2011 October DLK-31 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Monitor Item Condition
RKE-UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of UNLOCK signal from Intelligent Key
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
RKE-PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of Intelligent Key
RKE-MODE CHG Indicates [On/Off] condition of MODE CHANGE signal from Intelligent Key
When remote keyless entry receiver receives the signal transmitted while operating on Intelli-
RKE OPE COUN1
gent Key, the numerical value start changing
NOTE:
RKE OPE COUN2
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

*1: It is displayed but does not operate on CVT models.


*2: OFF is displayed when brake pedal is depressed while brake switch power supply is OFF.

ACTIVE TEST

Test item Description


This test is able to check Intelligent Key warning buzzer operation
OUTSIDE BUZZER • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning chime in combination meter operation
• Take Out: Take away warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
INSIDE BUZZER • Key: Key warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Knob: OFF position warning chime sounds when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check warning lamp operation
• KEY ON: “KEY” Warning lamp illuminates when CONSULT screen is touched
INDICATOR
• KEY IND: “KEY” Warning lamp blinks when CONSULT screen is touched
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
INT LAMP • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check meter display information
• BP N: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicate when CONSULT screen is touched
• BP I: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicate when CONSULT screen is touched
• ID NG: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• ROTAT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
LCD • SFT P: Shift P warning lamp indicate when CONSULT screen is touched
• INSRT: This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
• BATT: Key warning lamp indicator when CONSULT screen is touched
• NO KY: Key warning lamp indicator when CONSULT screen is touched
• OUTKEY: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicate when CONSULT screen is touched
• LK WN: Engine start operation indicator lamp indicate when CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check security hazard lamp operation
FLASHER
The hazard lamps are activated after “LH/RH/Off” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check horn operation
HORN
The horn is activated after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check CVT shift selector power supply
P RANGE • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
This test is able to check push-ignition switch illumination operation
ENGINE SW ILLUMI
Push-ignition switch illumination illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch operation
PUSH SWITCH INDICATOR
LOCK indicator in push-ignition switch illuminates when “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation.
BATTERY SAVER
The interior room lamp will be activated after “ON” on CONSULT screen is touched.
This test is able to check back door opener actuator open operation.
TRUNK/BACK DOOR
This actuator opens when “Open” on CONSULT screen is touched.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-32 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TRUNK
A
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000007578799

DATA MONITOR B

Monitor Item Contents


PUSH SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of push switch C
UNLK SEN -DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock sensor
VEH SPEED 1 Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter
D
TR/BD OPEN SW Indicates [ON/OFF] condition of back door opener switch.
NOTE:
TRNK/HAT MNTR
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored
E
NOTE:
RKE-TR/BD
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-33 2012 JUKE


BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION


BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007578800

ECU Reference
BCS-35, "Reference Value"
BCS-56, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-57, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart"
BCS-58, "DTC Index"

Revision: 2011 October DLK-34 2012 JUKE


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM A
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007578801
B

For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".
C

DLK

JRKWC1074GB

Revision: 2011 October DLK-35 2012 JUKE


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

JRKWC1075GB

Revision: 2011 October DLK-36 2012 JUKE


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DLK

JRKWC1076GB

Revision: 2011 October DLK-37 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000007797634

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW

Revision: 2011 October DLK-38 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A


1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) D
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
J
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected DLK
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-57, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM), and determine
trouble diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident". O
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step P
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 October DLK-39 2012 JUKE
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.

>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-40 2012 JUKE


B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578803
B

DTC DETECTION LOGIC


C
CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description
• Inside key antenna (instrument
D
center)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten-
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA • Harness or connector
na (instrument center) is sent to BCM
[Inside key antenna (instrument
center) circuit is open or shorted] E
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE F
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT G
KEY”.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected? H
YES >> Refer to DLK-41, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (instrument center) is OK.
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578804 I

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1


1. Turn ignition switch ON. J
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+) DLK
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
L

When Intelligent Key is in the M


antenna detection area

N
84 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
85

O
When Intelligent Key is not in
the antenna detection area
P

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
Revision: 2011 October DLK-41 2012 JUKE
B2621 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) harness
connector.

BCM Inside key antenna (instrument center)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
84 1
M70 M105 Existed
85 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
84
M70 Not existed
85

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (instrument center). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (instrument center) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the


antenna detection area

84 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
85

When Intelligent Key is not in


the antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (instrument center).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-42 2012 JUKE


B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578805

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Inside key antenna (console)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten- • Harness or connector
B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
na (console) is sent to BCM [Inside key antenna (console) cir-
cuit is open or shorted] D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.


2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT F
KEY”.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected? G
YES >> Refer to DLK-43, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (console) is OK.
H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578806

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 I


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
J
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal DLK

L
When Intelligent Key is in the an-
tenna detection area

M
86 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
87
N

When Intelligent Key is not in the


antenna detection area
O

JMKIA5951GB

P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (console) harness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-43 2012 JUKE


B2622 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Inside key antenna (console)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
86 1
M70 M106 Existed
87 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
86
M70 Not existed
87

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (console). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (console) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the an-


tenna detection area

86 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
87

When Intelligent Key is not in the


antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (console).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-44 2012 JUKE


B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578807

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Inside key antenna (luggage room)
An excessive high or low voltage from inside anten- • Harness or connector
B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
na (luggage room) is sent to BCM [Inside key antenna (luggage
room) circuit is open or shorted] D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.


2. Select “INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Perform inside key antenna (“INSIDE ANT DIAGNOSIS”) on “WORK SUPPORT” of “INTELLIGENT F
KEY”.
4. Check BCM for DTC.
Is inside key antenna DTC detected? G
YES >> Refer to DLK-45, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Inside key antenna (luggage room) is OK.
H
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578808

1.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 I


1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
J
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal DLK

L
When Intelligent Key is in the an-
tenna detection area

M
88 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
89
N

When Intelligent Key is not in the


antenna detection area
O

JMKIA5951GB

P
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-45 2012 JUKE


B2623 INSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) harness con-
nector.

BCM Inside key antenna (luggage room)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
88 1
M70 B82 Existed
89 2
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
88
M70 Not existed
89

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace inside key antenna (luggage room). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and inside key antenna (luggage room) connector.
3. Turn ignition switch ON.
4. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key is in the an-


tenna detection area

88 JMKIA3839GB
M70 Ground
89

When Intelligent Key is not in the


antenna detection area

JMKIA5951GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace inside key antenna (luggage room).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-46 2012 JUKE


B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578811

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Front door right outside key anten-
na
An excessive high or low voltage from front door
B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA • Harness or connector
right outside key antenna is sent to BCM D
[Front door right outside key anten-
na circuit is open or shorted]

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
1. Disconnect outside key antenna (passenger side) connector.
2. Perform “INTELLIGENT KEY” Self Diagnostic Result. F
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-47, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (passenger side) is OK. G

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578812

H
1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. I

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition J
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key DLK


is in the antenna de-
tection area (The dis-
tance between
L
Intelligent Key and an-
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
JMKIA5955GB
80 request switch is oper-
M70 Ground M
81 ated with ignition
switch OFF
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The N
distance between In-
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB
O

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) harness
connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-47 2012 JUKE


B2626 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Outside key antenna (passenger side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
80 1
M70 D14 Existed
81 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
80
M70 Not existed
81
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (passenger side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (passenger side) connector.
3. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key


is in the antenna de-
tection area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key and an-
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
80 request switch is oper- JMKIA5955GB
M70 Ground
81 ated with ignition
switch OFF
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The
distance between In-
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace outside key antenna (passenger side).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-48 2012 JUKE


B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578809

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Front door left outside key antenna
An excessive high or low voltage from front door left • Harness or connector
B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
outside key antenna is sent to BCM [Front door left outside key anten-
na circuit is open or shorted] D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Disconnect outside key antenna (driver side) connector.


2. Perform “INTELLIGENT KEY” Self Diagnostic Result.
F
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-49, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (driver side) is OK.
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578810

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 H


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
I
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal J

When Intelligent Key


is in the antenna de- DLK
tection area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key and an-
L
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
78 request switch is oper- JMKIA5955GB
M70 Ground
79 ated with ignition
switch OFF M
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The
distance between In- N
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (driver side) harness connec-
tor.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-49 2012 JUKE


B2627 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Outside key antenna (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
78 1
M70 D33 Existed
79 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
78
M70 Not existed
79
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (driver side). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM connector and outside key antenna (driver side) connector.
3. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key


is in the antenna de-
tection area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key and an-
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
78 request switch is oper- JMKIA5955GB
M70 Ground
79 ated with ignition
switch OFF
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The
distance between In-
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace outside key antenna (driver side).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-50 2012 JUKE


B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
A
DTC Logic INFOID:0000000007578813

DTC DETECTION LOGIC B

CONSULT display
DTC DTC detecting condition Possible cause
description C
• Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
An excessive high or low voltage from outside • Harness or connector
B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
key antenna (rear bumper) is sent to BCM [Outside key antenna (rear bumper)
circuit is open or shorted] D

DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE


1.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE E

1. Disconnect outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.


2. Perform “INTELLIGENT KEY” Self Diagnostic Result.
F
Is outside key antenna DTC detected?
YES >> Refer to DLK-51, "Diagnosis Procedure".
NO >> Outside key antenna (rear bumper) is OK.
G
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578814

1.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 1 H


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
I
(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal J

When Intelligent Key


is in the antenna de- DLK
tection area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key and an-
L
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
82 request switch is oper- JMKIA5955GB
M70 Ground
83 ated with ignition
switch OFF M
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The
distance between In- N
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> GO TO 2. P
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and outside key antenna (rear bumper) harness con-
nector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-51 2012 JUKE


B2628 OUTSIDE ANTENNA
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Outside key antenna (rear bumper)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
82 1
M70 B83 Existed
83 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Connector Terminal Continuity
Ground
82
M70 Not existed
83
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA INPUT SIGNAL 2
1. Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper). (New antenna or other antenna)
2. Connect BCM and outside key antenna (rear bumper) connector.
3. Check signal between BCM harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
BCM (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

When Intelligent Key


is in the antenna de-
tection area (The dis-
tance between
Intelligent Key and an-
tenna: 80 cm or less)
When the driver door
82 request switch is oper- JMKIA5955GB
M70 Ground
83 ated with ignition
switch OFF
When Intelligent Key
is not in the antenna
detection area (The
distance between In-
telligent Key and an-
tenna: Approx. 2 m)
JMKIA5954GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace outside key antenna (rear bumper).
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-52 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578815

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TRUNK/BACK DOOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Status


TRUNK/BACK DOOR OPEN Back door OPEN D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Back door opener actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-53, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578816

F
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector. G
3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage H
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

D106 1 Ground
Back door
ON 12 V
I
opener switch
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. J
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
DLK
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.

BCM Back door lock assembly L


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B10 53 D106 1 Existed
M
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
B10 53 Not existed
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness. P
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-53 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Back door lock assembly


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D106 2 Existed
Is the inspection normal?
YES >> Replace back door lock assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-54 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578817

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TR/BD OPEN SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed ON D
TR/BD OPEN SW Back door opener switch
Released OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-55, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578818
F

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector.
3. Check signal between back door opener switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
H
(+)
Signal
Back door opener switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal I

J
D107 1 Ground

DLK
JPMIA0012GB

Is the inspection result normal?


L
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch harness connector.
N
BCM Back door opener switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M68 30 D107 1 Existed O
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M68 30 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-55 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between back door opener switch harness connector and ground.

Back door opener switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D107 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
Refer to DLK-56, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578819

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector.
3. Check continuity between back door opener switch terminals.

Back door opener switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal

Back door opener Pressed Existed


1 2
switch Released Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-56 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578820

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “REQ SW-BD/TR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed On D
REQ SW-BD/TR Back door request switch
Released Off
Is the inspection result normal?
E
YES >> Back door request switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-57, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578821
F

1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. G
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector.
3. Check voltage between back door opener switch harness connector and ground.
H
(+)
Voltage
Back door opener switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal I
D107 3 Ground 12 V
Is the inspection result normal?
J
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT DLK
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch harness connector.
L
BCM Back door opener switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M68 51 D107 3 Existed M
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM N
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M68 51 Not existed
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair harness or connector. P
3.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door opener switch harness connector and ground.

Back door opener switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D107 4 Existed

Revision: 2011 October DLK-57 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-58, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578822

1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector.
3. Check continuity between back door opener switch terminals.

Back door opener switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Existed
3 4 Back door request switch
Released Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-58 2012 JUKE


BUZZER (COMBINATION METER)
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BUZZER (COMBINATION METER)
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578823

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Status


ON Buzzer sounds D
Take Out Take away warning
OFF Buzzer does not sound
INSIDE BUZZER
ON Buzzer sounds
Key OFF position warning E
OFF Buzzer does not sound
Is the inspection result normal?
Yes >> Buzzer (combination meter) is OK. F
No >> Refer to DLK-59, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578824

G
1.CHECK METER BUZZER CIRCUIT
Refer to WCS-36, "Component Function Check".
H
Is the inspection result normal?
Yes >> GO TO 2.
No >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
I
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
J
>> INSPECTION END

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-59 2012 JUKE


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578825

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEY CYL LK SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock ON
KEY CYL LK-SW
Neutral / Unlock OFF
Driver side door key cylinder
Unlock ON
KEY CYL UN-SW
Neutral / Lock OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-60, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578826

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage (V)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

5
D38 Ground

JPMIA0587GB

8.0 - 8.5 V
6 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
7 5
M68 D38 Existed
8 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-60 2012 JUKE


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
7
M68 Not existed B
8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". C
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. D

Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
D38 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH G
Refer to DLK-61, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578827

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DLK

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) terminal. L
3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.

Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Condition Continuity M
Terminal
Unlock Existed
5
Neutral / Lock Not existed N
4 Driver side door key cylinder
Lock Existed
6
Neutral / Unlock Not existed
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-61 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578828

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578829

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
D38 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
1 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
65 1
M69 D38 Existed
66 2
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
65
M69 Not existed
66
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-62 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL A


1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal C
66 Unlock
M69 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
65 Lock
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
E
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578830

F
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. G
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status H


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
J
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578831

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL DLK


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground. L

(+)
Front door lock assembly
(–) Condition
Voltage M
(passenger side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
6 Unlock N
D17 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
5 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT P
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-63 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
59 6
M69 D17 Existed
65 5
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
59
M69 Not existed
65
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
59 Unlock
M69 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
65 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
REAR LH
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578832

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578833

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-64 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

(+) A
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
B
D65 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
1 Lock
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT D
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector.
E
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B10 55 2
F
D65 Existed
M69 65 1
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. G

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal H
Ground
B10 55
Not existed
M69 65
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
J
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. DLK

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition L
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B10 55 Unlock
Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V M
M69 65 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator. N
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578834
O

1.CHECK FUNCTION
P
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-65 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578835

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
6 Unlock
D45 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
5 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.

BCM Rear door lock assembly RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
B10 55 6
D45 Existed
M69 65 5
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
B10 55
Not existed
M69 65
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
B10 55 Unlock
Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
M69 65 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-66 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578836

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock ON D
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Door lock and unlock switch
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW E
Unlock ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-67, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578837

G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector. H
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+) I
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
J
3

DLK
D35 Ground
15

L
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect BCM connector and power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
O
BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
12 3 P
M68 D35 Existed
13 15
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-67 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
12
M68 Not existed
13
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.

Power window main switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D35 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Refer to DLK-68, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-48, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578838

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch terminals.

Power window main switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
LOCK Existed
3
Door lock and unlock UNLOCK Not existed
1
switch LOCK Not existed
15
UNLOCK Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace power window main switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-68 2012 JUKE


DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578839

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “REQ SW-DR”, “REQ SW-AS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed ON D
REQ SW -DR Driver side door request switch
Released OFF
Pressed ON
REQ SW -AS Passenger side door request switch E
Released OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Front door request switch is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-69, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578840

G
1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector. H
3. Check voltage between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.

(+) I
Voltage
Front door request switch (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
J
Driver side D34 2
Ground 12 V
Passenger side D15 1
Is the inspection result normal? DLK
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH CIRCUIT L
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and BCM harness
connector. M

Front door request switch BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal N
Driver side D34 2 75
M70 Existed
Passenger side D15 1 100
O
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.

Front door request switch


Continuity P
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D34 2
Not existed
Passenger side D15 1
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-69 2012 JUKE


DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT


Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch harness connector and ground.

Front door request switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
Driver side D34 1
Existed
Passenger side D15 2
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Refer to DLK-70, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578841

1.CHECK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning front door request switch connector.
3. Check continuity between malfunctioning front door request switch terminals.

Front door request switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Existed
1 2 Door request switch
Released Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace malfunctioning front door request switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-70 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578842

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL”, “DOOR SW-RR”, “DOOR SW-BK” in “DATA
MONITOR” mode. C
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


D
Open On
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed Off
Open On E
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed Off G
Open On
DOOR SW-BK Back door
Closed Off
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-71, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578843

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL J


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. DLK

(+)
Signal
Door switch (–) L
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B48
M
Passenger side B49
2
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53 Ground N

Back door D106 3 PKIB4960J

7.0 - 8.0 V O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> Back door: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Other door: GO TO 4. P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-71 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side B48 47
Passenger side B49 45
2
Rear LH B71 B10 48 Existed
Rear RH B53 46
Back door D106 3 43
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.

Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B48
Passenger side B49 Ground
2
Rear LH B71 Not existed
Rear RH B53
Back door D106 3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Back door switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D106 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-72, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578844

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-72 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch A
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side B
Released Not existed
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Not existed C
2 Door switch
switch Pressed Existed
Rear LH
Released Not existed
Pressed Existed D
Rear RH
Released Not existed

Back door lock as- Lock Existed


Back door 3 4 E
sembly Unlock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-73 2012 JUKE


HAZARD FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD FUNCTION
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578845

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


LH Front turn signal lamp LH Turns ON
FLASHER RH Front turn signal lamp RH Turns ON
OFF Front turn signal lamp Turns OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-74, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578846

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT


Refer to EXL-66, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-74 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578847

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition


RKE OPE COUN1 Check that the numerical value is changing while operating on the Intelligent Key. D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Intelligent Key is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-75, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578848

F
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the G
current value becomes about 10 mA.

Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V


H
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace Intelligent Key.
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key battery. I

OCC0607D J

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-75 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578849

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “OUTSIDE BUZZER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ON Buzzer sounds
OUTSIDE BUZZER Outside warning buzzer
OFF Buzzer does not sound
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Intelligent Key warning buzzer is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-76, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578850

1.CHECK FUSE
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10 A fuse, [No. 13, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
2. Check voltage between Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Intelligent Key warning buzzer (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
E25 1 Ground Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and Intelligent Key warning buzzer harness connector.

BCM Intelligent Key warning buzzer


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M70 93 E25 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M70 93 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-76 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER A


Refer to DLK-77, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". B
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578851
C
1.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
D
2. Disconnect Intelligent Key warning buzzer connector.
3. Connect battery power supply directly to Intelligent Key warning buzzer terminals and check the opera-
tion.
E
Intelligent Key warning buzzer
Terminal Operation
(+) (−) F
1 3 Buzzer sounds
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
H

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-77 2012 JUKE


KEY WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY WARNING LAMP
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578852

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “INDICATOR” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


KEY ON Turns ON
INDICATOR KEY IND Key warning lamp Blinks
OFF Turns OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Key warning lamp is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-78, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578853

1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP


Refer to MWI-19, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-78 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578854

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “RKE OPE COUN1” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition


RKE OPE COUN1 Checks whether value changes when operating Intelligent Key D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-79, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578855

F
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector. G
3. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.

(+)
H
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Voltage
Connector Terminal
M75 1 Ground Battery voltage I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2. J
2.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART
Check the following. DLK
• 10 A fuse (No. 7)
• Harness for open or short between remote keyless entry receiver and battery
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.
N
BCM Remote keyless entry receiver
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M68 18 M75 4 Existed O
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM P
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M68 18 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-79 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER OUTPUT SIGNAL


1. Reconnect BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Waiting 12 V

M75 2 Ground Press the Intelligent


Key lock or unlock
button

JMMIA0572GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace remote keyless entry receiver.
5.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.

BCM Remote keyless entry receiver


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M68 38 M75 2 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M68 38 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
6.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-80 2012 JUKE


SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578856

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “LCD” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Status


LCD SFT P Shift P warning lamp Turns ON D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Shift P warning lamp is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-81, "Diagnosis Procedure". E

Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578857

F
1.CHECK SHIFT P WARNING LAMP
Refer to MWI-19, "On Board Diagnosis Function".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT H

Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".


I
>> INSPECTION END

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-81 2012 JUKE


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK SENSOR
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578858

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “UNLK SEN -DR” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock OFF
UNLK SEN -DR Driver side door
Unlock ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Unlock sensor is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-82, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578859

1.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check signal between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground using oscillo-
scope.

(+)
Signal
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

D38 3 Ground

PKIB4960J

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M68 31 D38 3 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M68 31 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-82 2012 JUKE


UNLOCK SENSOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT A

Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.
B
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D38 4 Existed C
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness. D
4.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR
Refer to DLK-83, "Component Inspection". E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side). F
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578860 H

1.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. I
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.
J
Front door lock assembly (driver side)
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Unlock Existed DLK
3 4 Driver side door
Lock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
L
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace front lock assembly (driver side).
M

Revision: 2011 October DLK-83 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000007578861

All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578862

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-67, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007578863

Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578864

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-62, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE

Revision: 2011 October DLK-84 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007578865

A
Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578866
B
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
C
Refer to DLK-63, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". E
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
REAR LH
G
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000007578867

Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
H
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578868

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR I


Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-64, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM DLK

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".


2. Confirm the operation after replacement. L
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident". M
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000007578869
N
Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578870
O
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check rear door lock assembly RH. P
Refer to DLK-65, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-85 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-86 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
A
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Description INFOID:0000000007578871
B
All doors do not lock/unlock using all door request switches.
ALL DOOR REQUEST SWITCHES : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578872
C
1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
Check remote keyless entry function. D
Does door lock/unlock with Intelligent Key button?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-20, "REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION : System Description". E
2.CHECK “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. F
3. Check “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “LOCK/UNLOCK BY I-KEY” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH H

Check door switch.


Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
J
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic". DLK
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal? L
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
Check outside key antenna.
• Driver side: Refer to DLK-49, "DTC Logic".
• Passenger side: Refer to DLK-47, "DTC Logic". N
• Rear bumper: Refer to DLK-51, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. O
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
P
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Revision: 2011 October DLK-87 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000007578873

All doors do not lock/unlock using driver side door request switch.
DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578874

1.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH


Check driver side door request switch.
Refer to DLK-69, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (driver side).
Refer to DLK-49, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000007578875

All doors do not lock/unlock using passenger side door request switch.
PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578876

1.CHECK PASSENGER SIDE DOOR REQUEST SWITCH


Check passenger side door request switch.
Refer to DLK-69, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-47, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH

Revision: 2011 October DLK-88 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Description INFOID:0000000007578877

A
All doors do not lock/unlock using back door request switch.
BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578878
B
1.CHECK BACK DOOR REQUEST SWITCH
Check back door request switch.
C
Refer to DLK-57, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check outside key antenna (rear bumper). E
Refer to DLK-51, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
G
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? H
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
I

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-89 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERATION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERA-
TION
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578879

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-67, "Component Function Check".
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Check door key cylinder switch.
Refer to DLK-60, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-90 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH INTELLIGENT KEY
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578880

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND TCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and TCM.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to TM-116, "DTC Index". (TCM)
2.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION D

Check door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.


Does door lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to DLK-67, "Component Function Check".
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER F
Check remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to DLK-79, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
H
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-75, "Component Function Check". I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. J
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. DLK
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
L
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-91 2012 JUKE


IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGNITION POSITION WARNING FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578881

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION
Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with driver side door lock knob and door key cylinder?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Refer to DLK-13, "System Description".
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-92 2012 JUKE


SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578882

1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” C
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2 D
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-93 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578883

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH


Check back door opener switch.
Refer to DLK-53, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Check back door opener actuator.
Refer to DLK-53, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal.
Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-94 2012 JUKE


AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578884

1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “AUTO LOCK SET” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-95 2012 JUKE


VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578885

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-96 2012 JUKE


IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578886

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. G
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-97 2012 JUKE


P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578887

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-28, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-98 2012 JUKE


HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578888

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” D

1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.


2. Select “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. E
3. Check the “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “HAZARD ANSWER BACK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” G
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”. H
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. I
NO >> Set “ANS BACK I-KEY LOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
4.CHECK “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT. J
2. Select “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check the “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)". DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Set “ANS BACK I-KEY UNLOCK” in “WORK SUPPORT”. L
5.CHECK HAZARD FUNCTION
Check hazard function.
M
Refer to DLK-74, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
N
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. O
Refer to DLK-76, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7. P
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-99 2012 JUKE


HAZARD AND BUZZER REMINDER DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-100 2012 JUKE


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578889

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index".
2.CHECK “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” D
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” in “WORK SUPPORT”. E
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> Set “ANTI KEY LOCK IN FUNCTI” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. G
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
I
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic". J
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. DLK

5.CHECK UNLOCK SENSOR


Check unlock sensor. L
Refer to DLK-82, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. M
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
N
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
O
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-101 2012 JUKE


OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
OFF POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578890

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to WCS-36, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-76, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-102 2012 JUKE


P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
P POSITION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578891

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM, TCM AND COMBINATION METER B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM, TCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to TM-116, "DTC Index". (TCM)
NO-3 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter) D
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER
Check combination meter buzzer. E
Refer to WCS-36, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. F
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. G
Refer to DLK-76, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4. H
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
I
Check front door switch (driver side).
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? J
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA DLK
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic". L
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6. M
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
N
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.REPLACE BCM P
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-103 2012 JUKE


ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
ACC WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578892

1.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER


Check combination meter buzzer.
Refer to WCS-36, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-104 2012 JUKE


TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
TAKE AWAY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578893

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK COMBINATION METER BUZZER D

Check combination meter buzzer.


Refer to WCS-36, "Component Function Check". E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. F
3.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check". G
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch. I
Refer to DLK-71, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5. J
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer. DLK
Refer to DLK-76, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
L
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA M
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic".
N
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 7. O
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
7.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-105 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY LOW BATTERY WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578894

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “INTELLIGENT KEY” of “BCM”.
2. Select “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-30, "INTELLIGENT KEY : CONSULT Function (BCM - INTELLIGENT KEY)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “LO- BATT OF KEY FOB WARN” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent key.
Refer to DLK-75, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-106 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK OPERATION WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578895

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK FUNCTION B


Check door lock function.
Does door lock/unlock using door request switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Refer to DLK-69, "Component Function Check".
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER D
Check Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
Refer to DLK-76, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM F
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? G
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
H

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-107 2012 JUKE


KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY ID WARNING DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578896

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-58, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK INTELLIGENT KEY
Check Intelligent Key.
Refer to DLK-75, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
Check inside key antenna.
• Instrument center: Refer to DLK-41, "DTC Logic".
• Console: Refer to DLK-43, "DTC Logic".
• Luggage room: Refer to DLK-45, "DTC Logic".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP
Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-108 2012 JUKE


KEY WARNING LAMP DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY WARNING LAMP DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578897

1.CHECK KEY WARNING LAMP B


Check key warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-78, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM D

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".


2. Confirm the operation after replacement. E
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident". F

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-109 2012 JUKE


UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578898

1.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-110 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
A
Work Flow INFOID:0000000007578899

SBT842

G
CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of H
customer's comments; refer to DLK-115, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate
the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur). I
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics J
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
DLK
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen- L
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing M
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand) N
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise) O
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that a technician P
may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-111 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following:
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs.
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise.
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis ear: J-39570, Engine ear and mechanics stethoscope).
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem-
porarily.
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-113, "Inspection Procedure".
REPAIR THE CAUSE
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible.
- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-
thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized Nissan Parts
Department.
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information.
The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick]
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks)
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE

Revision: 2011 October DLK-112 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE A
Used in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
B
DUCT TAPE
Used to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR C
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007578900 D

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL E
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing F
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
G
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint H
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness. I
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the
recheck of repair becomes impossible. J
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher DLK
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
L
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the following: M
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping N
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from O
the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer. P
In addition look for the following:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket

Revision: 2011 October DLK-113 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise.
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seats in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise.
Cause of seat noise include:
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area.
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment.
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-114 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000007578901

DLK

PIIB8740E
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-115 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PIIB8742E

Revision: 2011 October DLK-116 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION A


HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578902
B

JMKIA6518ZZ DLK

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Radiator core seal


4. Hood insulator 5. Hood bumper rubber 6. Grommet L
7. Clamp 8. Hood support rod 9. Hood hinge
: Clip

: Pawl M

: Body grease

HOOD ASSEMBLY N

HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578903

O
CAUTION:
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
P
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported by the proper material when removing hood
assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-117 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-118, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007578904

JMKIA5626GB

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-118 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm (in)
Difference A
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
E Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098) B
Hood – Front
A–A
bumper fascia F Surface height (-2.0) – (+2.0) [(-0.079) – (+0.079)] < 2.5 (0.098)
Hood – Front combi- C
B–B G Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
Hood – Front combi-
C–C H Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098) D
nation lamp
I Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 (0.098 – 0.177) < 1.5 (0.059)
Hood – Front fender D–D
J Surface height (-2.0) – (0.0) [(-0.079) – (0.000)] < 1.5 (0.059) E
FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
F
2. Remove hood lock assembly, and then adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly,
and front combination lamp according to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber.
3. Position hood lock assembly and engage hood striker. Check hood lock assembly and hood striker for G
looseness.
4. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of hood striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
H
5. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
6. Open hood. Rotate bumper rubber counterclockwise between half a turn and three-quarters of a turn.
7. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with secondary hood striker from the dead load of the I
hood assembly.
8. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary hood striker when hood assembly is closed
[free-fall from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height]. J
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
9. Install front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
DLK
HOOD HINGE
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578905
L
REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-117, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION N
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform hood hinge fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-120, "HOOD HINGE : Adjust- O
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-119 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply grease.

JMKIA5721ZZ

HOOD HINGE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007578906

JMKIA5626GB

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-120 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below. A
Unit: mm (in)
Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH, B
MAX)
Hood – Front E Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
A–A C
bumper fascia F Surface height (-2.0) – (+2.0) [(-0.079) – (+0.079)] < 2.5 (0.098)
Hood – Front combi-
B–B G Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp D
Hood – Front combi-
C–C H Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
I Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 (0.098 – 0.177) < 1.5 (0.059) E
Hood – Front fender D–D
J Surface height (-2.0) – (0.0) [(-0.079) – (0.000)] < 1.5 (0.059)
1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation". F
2. Remove hood lock assembly.
3. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
G
4. Remove front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove front fender assembly (LH and RH). Refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation".
6. Loosen hood hinge mounting bolts. H
7. Temporarily install front fender assembly (LH and RH), front combination lamp (LH and RH) and front
bumper fascia.
8. Adjust the clearance of hood assembly, front fender assembly (LH and RH), front combination lamp (LH I
and RH) and front bumper fascia according to the specified value, by moving hood hinge (body side).
9. Temporarily tighten hood hinge (LH and RH).
10. Remove front bumper fascia, front combination lamp (LH and RH) and front fender assembly (LH and J
RH).
11. Tighten hood hinge (LH and RH) to the specified torque.
12. Install front fender assembly (LH and RH). Refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation". DLK
13. Install front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
14. Install front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
15. Adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly, and front combination lamp according L
to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber.
16. Position hood lock assembly and engage hood striker. Check hood lock assembly and hood striker for
looseness. M
17. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of hood striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
18. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque. N
19. Open hood. Rotate bumper rubber counterclockwise between half a turn and three-quarters of a turn.
20. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with secondary hood striker from the dead load of the
hood assembly. O
21. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary hood striker when hood assembly is closed
[free-fall from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION: P
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
22. Install front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting
bolts and nuts.
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

Revision: 2011 October DLK-121 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578907

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Two workers are required to support the hood.
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported by the proper material when removing hood
assembly.
2. Pull hood support rod from grommet and remove.
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-122 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578908

J
JMKIA6519GB

1. Radiator core support upper 2. Air guide (RH) 3. Radiator core support lower DLK
4. Air guide (LH)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)
L
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578909

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER M

Removal
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation". N
2. Remove front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove headlamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-81, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect crash zone sensor harness connector. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation". O
CAUTION:
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and then wait for at least 3 minutes.
5. Remove hood lock and hood lock cable fixing clip. Refer to DLK-147, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : P
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove horn bracket. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-123 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
7. Remove upper fixing clips (2) of air guide (LH and RH) (1).

JMKIA6023ZZ

8. Remove hood support rod. Refer to DLK-122, "HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation".
9. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
Removal
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove lower fixing clips (2) of radiator side seal (LH and RH)
(1).

JMKIA6024ZZ

3. Using strings (A), hang inlet hose (1) and inlet hose (2) together
with charge air cooler.
CAUTION:
Never damage inlet hoses and charge air cooler.

JMKIA6025ZZ

4. Support lower side radiator using wooden blocks (A) and a floor
jack (B).
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator.

JMKIA6026ZZ

5. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation

Revision: 2011 October DLK-124 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Install in the reverse order of removal.
A

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-125 2012 JUKE


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT FENDER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578910

JMKIA5632ZZ

1. Front fender assembly 2. Front fender stiffener


: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578911

REMOVAL
1. Remove front fillet molding. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT FILLET MOLDING : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove sill cover. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove front fender cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View".
6. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-90, "Removal and Installation".
8. Remove mounting bolts of front fender assembly.
9. Remove front fender stiffener (2) from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle
outside.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5633ZZ

10. Remove front fender assembly.


CAUTION:
An viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov-
ing the viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-126 2012 JUKE


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting A
bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-118, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
B
- Front door: Refer to DLK-130, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-127 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578912

JMKIA5877GB

1. Front door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt


4. Door striker 5. Door pad 6. Bumper rubber
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
10. Grommet
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578913

WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes
or more.
• Never use the air tools or electric tools for servicing.
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL

Revision: 2011 October DLK-128 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Disconnect front door harness connector.
A

JMKIA5878ZZ

D
2. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.
3. Remove door hinge mounting bolts (door side), and then remove door assembly.
INSTALLATION E
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface. F
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-130, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
G
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-129 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007578914

JMKIA5638GB

1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door


4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower)
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)
Portion Clearance Surface height
Front fender – Front door A–A 3.0 – 5.0 (0.118 – 0.197) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.3 – 5.3 (0.130 – 0.209) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-130 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side. A
5. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts on body side.
6. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion. B
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts C
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation". D
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER E

DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578915

F
REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION G
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. H
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-130, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE I
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578916

J
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- DLK
tect door and body.
1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-126, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-128, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation". L
3. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION M
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. N
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-130, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. O

Revision: 2011 October DLK-131 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5641ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK


DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578917

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect harness connector of front door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of front door speaker, and then remove front door speaker.
5. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.
6. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on door panel.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2).

JMKIA5879ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5642ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-132 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578918

I
JMKIA5880GB

1. Rear door panel 2. TORX bolt 3. Door striker J


4. Door check link 5. Door hinge (lower) 6. Door hinge (upper)
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)


DLK

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease L

DOOR ASSEMBLY
M
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578919

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight. N
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL O

Revision: 2011 October DLK-133 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove rear door harness grommet (2) from body side outer
(1), and then pull out rear door harness.

JMKIA5881ZZ

2. Disconnect rear door harness connector.

JMKIA5882ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.


4. Remove door hinge mounting bolts (door side), and then remove rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-135, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-134 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007578920

DLK

JMKIA5638GB

L
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door
4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower) M
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)


N
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures O
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)
Portion Clearance Surface height P
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.3 – 5.3 (0.130 – 0.209) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-135 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578921

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-135, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578922

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-133, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
3. Remove rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts (body side), and then remove door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-135,
"DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-136 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease. A

: Grease up point
B

JMKIA5641ZZ

D
DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578923

E
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the rear door window.
F
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove mounting bolts of rear door speaker, and then remove rear door speaker.
4. Disconnect harness connector of rear door speaker. G
5. Remove mounting bolt of the check link on the vehicle.
6. Remove mounting bolts of the check link on door panel.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2). H

JMKIA5879ZZ DLK
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: L
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease. M

: Grease up point

JMKIA5642ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-137 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578924

REMOVAL

JMKIA5652ZZ

1. Back door weather-strip 2. Back door stay 3. Back door stay lower bracket
4. Bumper rubber 5. Back door striker 6. Back door panel
7. Back door hinge 8. Hole cover
A : Center mark B : Seam
: Do not reuse
: Body grease

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY


BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578925

CAUTION:
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side upper finisher (LH and RH). Refer to INT-35, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER
: Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-138 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Disconnect harness connector.
A
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5653ZZ

D
3. Remove rear washer hose (1) from hose mounting clip (A), and
then disengage hose.

: Vehicle front
E

G
JMKIA5654ZZ

4. Remove center pillar upper garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation". H
5. Remove upper side of back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-144, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP :
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove rear assist grip (LH and RH) and mounting clips for rear portion of headlining, and then remove I
rear portion of headlining. Refer to INT-26, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" or INT-29, "SUNROOF :
Removal and Installation".
7. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A) and harness fixing J
clips (B).

: Vehicle front
DLK

JMKIA5655ZZ M
8. Remove grommet (1), and then pull out harness from roof panel
(2).
N

P
JMKIA5657ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-139 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
9. Remove grommet (2), and then pull out harness and washer
tube from roof panel (1).

JMKIA5658ZZ

10. Support back door with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
11. Remove back door stay (back door side). Refer to DLK-143, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
12. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts on back door and remove back door assembly.

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-141, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-140 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007578926

DLK

JMKIA9210GB

L
1. Back door assembly 2. Bumper rubber (upper) 3. Bumper rubber (lower)
4. Back door hinge 5. Back door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Roof panel 8. Rear combination lamp 9. Back door glass M
10. Rear bumper fascia
: Do not reuse
N
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by seeing and touching. O
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm (in) P
Difference
Portion Standard
(LH/RH, MAX)
Roof panel – Back D Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276) —
A–A
door E Surface height 0.9 – 2.9 (0.035 – 0.114) —

Revision: 2011 October DLK-141 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Difference
Portion Standard
(LH/RH, MAX)
Rear combination
lamp – Back door B–B F Clearance 2.8 – 7.2 (0.110 – 0.283) <2.0 (0.079)
glass
Rear bumper fas- G Clearance 6.0 – 10.0 (0.236 – 0.394) —
C–C
cia – Back door H Surface height (-2.5) – (+1.0) [(-0.098) – (+0.039)] —
FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
1. Loosen back door striker mounting bolts.
2. Loosen back door hinge mounting nuts (back door side).
3. Adjust back door using back door striker and back door hinge to the specified value, as shown in the fol-
lowing table.
4. After adjustment tighten back door striker mounting bolts and back door hinge mounting nuts (back door
side) to the specified torque.
5. Screw bumper rubber (upper) into the stopper position (A), and
then loosen by a half turn.
6. Screw bumper rubber (lower) into the end position of threads.

JMKIA5843ZZ

CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of back door hinge mounting
nuts.
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust back door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door lock insertion direction.
BACK DOOR STRIKER
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578927

REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove TORX bolts, and then remove back door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-141, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578928

REMOVAL
1. Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-138, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts (body side), and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION

Revision: 2011 October DLK-142 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: A
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-141, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
B
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply body grease.

E
JMKIA5659ZZ

BACK DOOR STAY


BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578929 F

REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side upper finisher and rear pillar cap. Refer to INT-35, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FIN- G
ISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Support the back door with the suitable material to prevent it from falling.
H
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
3. Remove back door stay mounting bolts (body side). I
4. Remove the metal clip (3) located on the connection between
the back door stay (1) and the stud ball (2) (back door side) by
using a flat-bladed screwdriver (A). J
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage painted surface.
5. Remove back door stay (back door side). DLK

JMKIA2255ZZ

6. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove back door stay lower bracket. M

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: N
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
O

Revision: 2011 October DLK-143 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000007578930

1. Fix back door stay (1) using a vise (C).


2. Using hacksaw (A) slowly make 2 holes in the back door stay, in
numerical order as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
• When cutting a hole on back door stay, always cover a
hacksaw using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering metal
fragments or oil.
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.

JMKIA3336ZZ

A: 20 mm (0.787 in)
B: Cut at the groove.

JMKIA3609ZZ

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP


BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578931

REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint.
CAUTION:
Never pull strongly on weather-strip.
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align weather-strip center mark with vehicle center position mark and
install weather-strip onto the vehicle.
2. For the lower section, insert pad (A) into weather-strip (1), and
then fix the connection point.

JMKIA5661ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-144 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Align the connecting point (B) of weather-strip (2) to the center
(A) of striker (1), and then install as shown in the figure. A

JMKIA5662ZZ

D
4. Pull weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.
NOTE:
Check that weather-strip fits tightly in each corner and luggage rear plate.
E

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-145 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578932

JMKIA5899GB

1. Hood lock control cable assembly 2. Hood lock assembly


: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

HOOD LOCK
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578933

REMOVAL
1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.
4. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly (2) from hood lock
assembly (1).

JMKIA5900ZZ

INSTALLATION

Revision: 2011 October DLK-146 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: A
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-118, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
B
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-147, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578934 C

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly. D
2. Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock cable clip.
E
4. Remove hood lock control cable assembly of instrument lower
panel (LH), and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from
fuel filler lid opener lever (1).
F

H
JMKIA5901ZZ

5. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart-
ment. I
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
J
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more. DLK
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.
L

N
PIIB5801E

• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock. O
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-118, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-147, "Inspection". P
Inspection INFOID:0000000007578935

NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with securely striker from the dead load of the hood
assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-147 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall
from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
3. While operating the hood opener carefully, check that the front end of the hood is lifted by approximately
20 mm (0.787 in) (A). Also, check that the hood opener returns to the original position.

JMKIA5673ZZ

1. Primary striker 2. Primary latch 3. Secondary latch


4. Secondary striker

4. Check that secondary latch is properly engaged with secondary striker [6.8 mm (0.268 in)] (B).
5. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
body grease to hood lock.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5674ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-148 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578936

I
JMKIA5883GB

1. Door key cylinder assembly (driver 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket J
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen-
ger side)
4. TORX bolt 5. Key rod (driver side) 6. Door lock assembly DLK
7. Inside handle 8. Outside handle 9. Front gasket
10. Cable clip
L
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Do not reuse M
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease
N
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578937 O

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door glass and front door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-16, "Removal and Installation". P
2. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-150, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage inside handle cable and lock knob cable from cable clip.
4. Remove outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-150, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts.
6. Disconnect door lock actuator connector, and then remove door lock assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-149 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5892ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578938

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove inside handle mounting bolt (A).
3. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5884ZZ

4. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1).

JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578939

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-150 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE: A
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Disengage lock holder (1), and then separate key rod (3) from B
door lock assembly (2).(Driver side)

JMKIA5886ZZ E

5. Disconnect harness connector of door antenna (1) and door


request switch (2) and remove harness clamp (3).
F
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5887ZZ

6. Remove grommet (1) of door side. Loosen, through grommet I


hole, TORX bolt (2) that fixes door lock cylinder. (For passenger
side, TORX bolt fixes outside handle escutcheon.)
J

DLK

JMKIA5888ZZ
L

7. While pulling outside handle, remove door key cylinder assem-


bly (diver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side). M

JMKIA0560ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-151 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
8. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to
remove outside handle.

JMKIA0524ZZ

9. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ

10. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5890ZZ

11. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2).

JMKIA5891ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt.
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-152 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578940

I
JMKIA5893GB

1. Outside handle assembly 2. Rear door sealing screen 3. Door lock assembly J
4. TORX bolt 5. Inside handle
: Clip
: Pawl DLK
: Vehicle front
: Do not reuse L
: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease
M
DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578941 N

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door glass and rear door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-20, "Removal and Installation". O
2. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-154, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-154, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts. P
5. Disconnect door lock actuator connector, and then remove door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-153 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5892ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578942

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
3. Remove inside handle mounting bolt (A).
4. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5884ZZ

5. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1).

JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578943

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher and rear door corner cover inner. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear door sealing screen.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-154 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Rotate stopper (1) upward.
4. Disengage outside handle cable (2), and then remove outside A
handle cable from outside handle assembly (3).

JMKIA5894ZZ

D
5. Remove outside handle assembly mounting bolts (A).

G
JMKIA5895ZZ

6. Disengage mounting clips using a remover tool (A), and then


H
remove outside handle assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the door panel to protect the
painted surface from damage. I

: Clip
J

JMKIA5896ZZ
DLK
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: L
• Never reuse rear door sealing screen. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
When installing rear door sealing screen, install it according to the following procedure.
- Put lower portion of rear door sealing screen (1) into inside of M
door panel (2).
- Perform positioning according to the following procedure,
and then install rear door sealing screen.
• Align upper portion of rear door sealing screen to hole (A) of N
door panel as shown in the figure.
• Align hole of rear door sealing screen to edge (B) of door
panel as shown in the figure. O

JMKIA5897ZZ P

• Be careful to position outside handle cable normally when installing it. For details, refer to DLK-153,
"Exploded View".
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-155 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578944

JMKIA5714GB

1. Back door lock assembly 2. TORX bolt 3. Back door striker


: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578945

REMOVAL
1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-38, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove back door lock assembly mounting bolts.
3. Disconnect back door lock connector, and then remove back door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check back door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
EMERGENCY LEVER
EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures INFOID:0000000007578946

UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE:
If back door lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, follow the procedures to
unlock back door.
1. Remove emergency lid. Refer to INT-39, "EMERGENCY LID : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-156 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. From inside the vehicle, rotate emergency lever toward lower
direction and unlock. A

JMKIA5616ZZ

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-157 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578947

JMKIA5904ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Cable protector 3. Fuel filler lid lock assembly
4. Fuel filler lid assembly 5. Spring 6. Bumper rubber
: Clip
: Do not reuse

FUEL FILLER LID


FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578948

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove fuel mounting pin (1).

JMKIA5717ZZ

3. Remove mounting screws, and then remove fuel filler lid.


INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-158 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation. A
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the mounting screws.
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specifide values for checking nomal installation status.
B
• Fitting adjustment cannot be perfomed.
Unit: mm (in)

Clearance Evenness C
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer 2.0 – 4.0 (0.079 – 0.157) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
D
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578949

REMOVAL E
1. Remove hood lock control cable assembly from instrument lower panel (LH). Refer to DLK-147, "HOOD
LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid opener F
lever (1).

I
JMKIA5901ZZ

3. Remove front kicking plate inner (LH) and rear kicking plate inner (LH and RH). Refer to INT-18, "KICK-
ING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation". J
4. Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-20, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish (LH). Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH :
Removal and Installation". DLK
6. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-160, "FUEL FILLER LID L
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel
filler lid opener cable (2). M

JMKIA5720ZZ

P
9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-159 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578950

REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
3. Rotate and disengage fuel filler lid lock assembly, and then
remove fuel filler lid lock assembly.
NOTE:
Operation is performed easily when rotating fuel filler lid lock
from passenger room side.

JMKIA5718ZZ

4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable (1). Remove fuel filler lid
opener cable while pressing stopper pin (2).

JMKIA5719ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-160 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578951

JMKIA2569GB
E
1. Door switch 2. TORX bolt

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578952 F

REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolt (A), and then remove door switch (1). G

JMKIA2173ZZ J
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-161 2012 JUKE


INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
INSTRUMENT CENTER
INSTRUMENT CENTER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578953

REMOVAL
1. Remove the multi display unit. Refer to AV-162, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (instrument center) (1) mount-
ing clip (A), and then remove inside key antenna (instrument
center).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop mounting clip (A) into instrument
panel.

JMKIA5573ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CONSOLE
CONSOLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578954

REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console assembly. Refer to IP-22, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (console) (1) mounting clip (A),
and then remove inside key antenna (console).

JMKIA5575ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
LUGGAGE ROOM

Revision: 2011 October DLK-162 2012 JUKE


INSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
LUGGAGE ROOM : Exploded View INFOID:0000000007578955

JMKIA5576ZZ
F
1. Inside key antenna (luggage room) 2. Clip
: Do not reuse
G
LUGGAGE ROOM : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578956

H
REMOVAL
1. Remove the luggage floor finisher. Refer to INT-32, "Exploded View".
2. Remove the inside key antenna (luggage room) (1) mounting I
clip RH (A).

DLK

JMKIA5577ZZ L

3. Disengage inside key antenna (luggage room) fixing clip using a


flat-bladed screwdriver (A), and then pull out forward the inside M
key antenna (luggage room).

JMKIA5578ZZ

INSTALLATION P
Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Visually check the clips for deformation and damage during installation.
Replace with new ones if necessary.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-163 2012 JUKE


OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
OUTSIDE KEY ANTENNA
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578957

REMOVAL
Remove the driver side outside handle. Refer to DLK-150, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578958

REMOVAL
Remove the passenger side outside handle. Refer to DLK-150, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installa-
tion".
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
REAR BUMPER
REAR BUMPER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578959

REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the outside key antenna (rear bumper) (1) mounting
clip (A), then remove outside key antenna (rear bumper).

JMKIA5580ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-164 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY WARNING BUZZER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578960

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer (1) mounting bolt
(A), and then remove the Intelligent Key warning buzzer.
C

E
JMKIA5571ZZ

INSTALLATION F
Install in the reverse order of removal.

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-165 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578961

REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the remote keyless entry receiver (1) mounting bolt (A),
and then remove remote keyless entry receiver.

JMKIA6084ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-166 2012 JUKE


INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITH INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007578962

1. Release the lock knob at the back of the Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical key. B

2. Insert a remover tool (A) wrapped with a cloth into the slit of the
corner and twist it to separate the upper part from the lower part. C
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The key fob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet,
immediately wipe it dry. D

PIIB6221E

F
3. Replace the battery with new one.

Battery replacement :Coin-type lithium battery G


(CR2025)

4. Align the tips of the upper and lower parts, and then push them H
together until it is securely closed.
CAUTION:
• When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other for-
eign materials off the electrode contact area. I
• After replacing the battery, check that all Intelligent Key
functions work normally.
J

PIIB6222E DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-167 2012 JUKE


PRECAUTIONS
< PRECAUTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PRECAUTION
PRECAUTIONS
Precaution for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER" INFOID:0000000007578963

The Supplemental Restraint System such as “AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER”, used along
with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front passenger for certain
types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage front air bag modules. The SRS
system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag deployment, and may only deploy one front
air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the “SRS AIR BAG” and “SEAT BELT” of this
Service Manual.
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death in
the event of a collision that would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed by
an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
• Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to personal
injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and Air Bag
Module, see “SRS AIR BAG”.
• Never use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this Ser-
vice Manual. SRS wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness
connectors.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING POWER TOOLS (AIR OR ELECTRIC) AND HAMMERS
WARNING:
Always observe the following items for preventing accidental activation.
• When working near the Air Bag Diagnosis Sensor Unit or other Air Bag System sensors with the
ignition ON or engine running, never use air or electric power tools or strike near the sensor(s) with
a hammer. Heavy vibration could activate the sensor(s) and deploy the air bag(s), possibly causing
serious injury.
• When using air or electric power tools or hammers, always switch the ignition OFF, disconnect the
battery, and wait at least 3 minutes before performing any service.
Precaution for Procedure without Cowl Top Cover INFOID:0000000007578965

When performing the procedure after removing cowl top cover, cover
the lower end of windshield with urethane, etc to prevent damage to
windshield.

PIIB3706J

Work INFOID:0000000007578966

• After removing and installing the opening/closing parts, be sure to carry out fitting adjustments to check their
operational.
• Check the lubrication level, damage, and wear of each part. If necessary, grease or replace it.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-168 2012 JUKE


PREPARATION
< PREPARATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

PREPARATION A
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools INFOID:0000000007578967
B
The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number C
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name
D

(J-39570)
Locating the noise E
Chassis ear

SIIA0993E F

(J-43980)
G
NISSAN Squeak and Rat- Repairing the cause of noise
tle Kit
H
SIIA0994E

Commercial Service Tools INFOID:0000000007578968 I

Tool name Description


J

DLK
Engine ear Locating the noise

L
SIIA0995E

Remover tool Remove the clips, pawls, and metal clips


N

PIIB7923J

Power tool P

PIIB1407E

Revision: 2011 October DLK-169 2012 JUKE


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
COMPONENT PARTS
Component Parts Location INFOID:0000000007578969

JMKIA6160ZZ

1. IPDM E/R 2. TCM 3. Combination meter


Refer to PCS-34, "Component Parts Refer to TM-69, "CVT CONTROL
Location" SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion"
4. Key switch 5. BCM 6. Power window main switch
Refer to BCS-83, "BODY CONTROL (door lock/unlock switch)
SYSTEM : Component Parts Loca-
tion"
7. Front door switch (driver side) 8. Front door lock assembly (driver 9. Back door opener assembly
side)
10. Back door opener switch 11. Remote keyless entry receiver
A. View with the glove box assembly re-
moved

Component Description INFOID:0000000007578970

Item Function
Back door opener actuator Opens the back door with the back door open signal from BCM.
Back door opener switch Inputs back door opener switch operation signal to BCM.
BCM Controls the door lock system.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-170 2012 JUKE


COMPONENT PARTS
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Item Function
A
• Performs operation method guide and warning with buzzer.
Combination meter
• Transmits vehicle seep signal to CAN communication line.
• Inputs locks/unlocks signal from BCM and locks/unlocks each door.
Door lock actuator B
• Integrated in each door lock assembly.
Door lock and unlock switch Transmits door lock/unlock operation to BCM.
Door switch Detects door open/close condition.
C
IPDM E/R Sounds horn via CAN communication between BCM.
Keyfob Transmits button operation to remote keyless entry receiver.
Key switch detects that ignition key is inserted into the ignition key cylinder, and D
Key switch
then transmits the signal to BCM.
Remote keyless entry receiver Receives keyfob operation and transmits to BCM.
TCM Transmits shift position signal to BCM via CAN communication line. E

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-171 2012 JUKE


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578971

JMKIA6161GB

System Description INFOID:0000000007578972

DOOR LOCK FUNCTION


• The door lock and unlock switch (driver side) is build into power window main switch.
• Interlocked with the locking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors are
locked.
• Interlocked with the unlocking operation of door lock and unlock switch, door lock actuators of all doors and
are unlocked.
Door Key Cylinder
• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “LOCK”, will lock door lock
actuator of all doors.
• With the door key inserted in the door key cylinder on driver side, turning it to “UNLOCK” once unlocks the
driver side door lock actuator; turning it to “UNLOCK” again within 5 seconds after the first unlock operation
unlocks all of the other doors. (SELECTIVE UNLOCK OPERATION)
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION
When door lock and unlock switch are operated while key is inserted into key switch and any door is open,
door locks once but immediately unlocks. This operation prevents keyfob from being left in the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (LOCK OPERATION)
The interlock door lock function is the function that locks all doors linked with the vehicle speed or shift posi-
tion. It has 2 types as follows.
Vehicle Speed Sensing Auto Door Lock
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed reaches 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is turned ON, all
doors are closed and the vehicle speed received from the combination meter via CAN communication
becomes 24 km/h (15 MPH) or more.
P Range Interlock Door Lock*
All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from the P position to any position other than P.
BCM outputs the lock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON posi-
tion and the shift signal received from the TCM via CAN communication is shifted from the P position to any
position other than P.
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The lock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock function and the type selection of the automatic door lock/
unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT.
Without CONSULT

Revision: 2011 October DLK-172 2012 JUKE


POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
The automatic door lock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation.
1. Close all doors (door switch OFF) A
2. Turn ignition switch ON
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the lock direction within 20 sec-
onds after turning the ignition switch ON. B
4. The switching is completed when the hazard warning lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 2 blinks C
ON → OFF : 1 blink

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION (UNLOCK OPERATION) D


The automatic door lock/unlock function is the function that unlocks all doors linked with the key position or
shift position. It has 3 types as follows.
IGN OFF Interlock Door Unlock E
All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to OFF.
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the power supply position is
changed from ignition switch ON to OFF. F
Key out Interlock Door Unlock
When ignition key is removed from ignition knob switch, all doors unlock.
When BCM detects that ignition key is removed from ignition knob switch, BCM transmits unlock signal to all G
door lock actuators.
P Range Interlock Door Unlock*
All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other than the P to P position. H
BCM outputs the unlock signal to all door lock actuators when it detects that the ignition switch is in the ON
position and the shift signal received from TCM via CAN communication is shifted from any position other than
the P to P position.
I
Setting change of Automatic Door Lock/Unlock Function
The unlock operation setting of the automatic door lock/unlock function can be changed.
With CONSULT J
The ON/OFF switching of the automatic door lock/unlock function and the type selection of the automatic door
lock/unlock function can be performed at the WORK SUPPORT setting of CONSULT.
Without CONSULT
The automatic door lock/unlock function ON/OFF can be switched by performing the following operation. DLK
1. Close all doors below (door switch OFF)
2. Turn ignition switch ON
L
3. Press and hold the door lock and unlock switch for 5 seconds or more in the unlock direction within 20
seconds after turning the power supply position ON.
4. The switching is completed when the hazard warning lamp blinks.
M

OFF → ON : 2 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink
N
*: This function does not operate on M/T models.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-173 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578973

JMKIA6162GB

System Description INFOID:0000000007578974

DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK OPERATION


• When door lock and unlock button of keyfob is pressed, door lock and unlock signal transmits from keyfob to
BCM via remote keyless entry receiver.
• When BCM receives the door lock and unlock signal, it operates door lock actuator, blinks the hazard lamp
at the same time as a reminder.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, door lock/unlock operation is performed if the keyfob is operated.

Remote controller operation Operation condition


Lock/unlock Ignition key is removed from ignition key cylinder

OPERATION AREA
To ensure that the keyfob works effectively, use within 1 m (3 ft) range of each door, however the operable
range may differ according to surroundings.
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION
• When an LOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob, all doors are locked.
• When an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob once, driver side door is unlocked.
• Then, if an UNLOCK signal is transmitted from keyfob again, all other doors are unlocked.
How to change selective unlock mode.
With CONSULT
Selective unlock mode can be set to ON or OFF using CONSULT.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Without CONSULT
• ON/OFF can be switched when keyfob lock button and unlock button are pressed simultaneously for 5 sec-
onds or more while steering lock is locked.
• When mode is switched, hazard warning lamp blinks.

OFF → ON : 3 blinks
ON → OFF : 1 blink

HAZARD AND HORN REMINDER FUNCTION


When doors are locked or unlocked by keyfob, BCM blinks hazard warning lamps as a reminder and transmits
horn chirp signal to IPDM E/R. IPDM E/R sounds horn as a reminder.
The hazard and horn reminder has a horn chirp mode (C mode) and a non-horn chirp mode (S mode).
Operating Function of Hazard and Horn Reminder

Revision: 2011 October DLK-174 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

C mode S mode A
Back door Back door
Keyfob operation Lock Unlock Lock Unlock
open open
Hazard warning lamp blinks Twice Once — Twice — — B
Horn sound Once — — — — —
Hazard and horn reminder does not operate if ignition switch ON position.
How to change hazard and horn reminder mode C
With CONSULT
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
D
Without CONSULT
When LOCK and UNLOCK signals are sent from the Intelligent Key for more than 2 seconds at the same time,
the hazard and horn reminder mode is changed and hazard warning lamp blinks and horn sounds as per the
following items: E

JMKIA6362GB H
AUTO DOOR LOCK FUNCTION
After door is unlocked by keyfob button operation and if 1 minute or more passes without performing the fol-
lowing operation, all doors are automatically locked. However, operation check function does not activate. I

• Door switch is ON (door is open)


Operating condition • Door is locked J
• Key switch is ON
Auto door lock mode can be changed by the “AUTO LOCK SET” mode in “WORK SUPPORT”. Refer to DLK-
177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". DLK
PANIC ALARM FUNCTION
When key switch in the OFF position, BCM transmits horn reminder signal to IPDM E/R. Then, IPDM E/R
turns on and off horn intermittently. Refer to SEC-123, "VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM : System Description". L
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP CONTROL FUNCTION
Interior room lamp is controlled according to door lock/unlock state, refer to INL-6, "INTERIOR ROOM LAMP
CONTROL SYSTEM : System Description". M

Revision: 2011 October DLK-175 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR OPENER SYSTEM
System Diagram INFOID:0000000007578975

JMKIA6011GB

System Description INFOID:0000000007578976

BACK DOOR OPENER OPERATION


When back door opener switch is pressed, BCM operates back door opener actuator.
NOTE:
Back door opener actuator is not for locking the back door. The function is only to open the back door.
OPERATION CONDITION
If the following conditions are satisfied, back door opener operation is performed.

Back door opener switch operation Operation condition


• When back door is unlocked using back door opener request switch (selective unlock
Back door open mode), or after BCM outputs all doors unlock signal
• Vehicle speed is less than 5 km/h (3 MPH)
NOTE:
• When battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected during all doors unlock state, back door may not
open.
• Regardless of door lock actuator state, BCM resets recognition of all doors unlock state approximately 30
seconds after battery terminal is disconnected and BCM recognizes that all doors are in lock state.
• When battery terminal is reconnected and back door does not open, have BCM recognize that all doors are
in unlock state.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-176 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
A
COMMON ITEM
COMMON ITEM : CONSULT Function (BCM - COMMON ITEM) INFOID:0000000007818190
B
APPLICATION ITEM
CONSULT performs the following functions via CAN communication with BCM.
C
Diagnosis mode Function Description
Work Support Changes the setting for each system function.
D
Self Diagnostic Result Displays the diagnosis results judged by BCM.
CAN Diag Support Monitor Monitors the reception status of CAN communication viewed from BCM.
Data Monitor The BCM input/output signals are displayed. E
Active Test The signals used to activate each device are forcibly supplied from BCM.
Ecu Identification The BCM part number is displayed.
• Read and save the vehicle specification. F
Configuration
• Write the vehicle specification when replacing BCM.

SYSTEM APPLICATION
G
BCM can perform the following functions for each system.
NOTE:
It can perform the diagnosis modes except the following for all sub system selection items.
×: Applicable item H
Diagnosis mode
System Sub system selection item
Work Support Data Monitor Active Test
I
Door lock DOOR LOCK × × ×
Rear window defogger REAR DEFOGGER × ×
Warning chime BUZZER × × J
Interior room lamp control INT LAMP × × ×
Remote keyless entry system MULTI REMOTE ENT × × ×
Exterior lamp HEAD LAMP × × ×
DLK

Wiper and washer WIPER × × ×


Turn signal and hazard warning lamps FLASHER × × L
Air conditioning system AIR CONDITONER × ×
Combination switch COMB SW ×
Body control system BCM × M
NATS IMMU × ×
Interior room lamp battery saver BATTERY SAVER × × ×
N
Back door open TRUNK ×
Theft warning alarm THEFT ALM × × ×
RAP system RETAINED PWR × × O
Signal buffer system SIGNAL BUFFER × ×
Panic alarm PANIC ALARM ×
P
TPMS AIR PRESSUE MONITOR × × ×

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK) INFOID:0000000007578978

WORK SUPPORT

Revision: 2011 October DLK-177 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Monitor item Description


Anti-hijack function can be changed to operate with this mode
DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Automatic door lock function can be selected from the following in this mode
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SE- • VH SPD: All doors are locked when vehicle speed more than 24km/h (15MPH)
LECT • P RANGE*: All doors are locked when shifting the selector lever from P position to other
than the P position
Automatic door unlock function can be selected from the following in the mode
• MODE 1: All doors are unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON to
OFF
• MODE 2*: All doors are unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position other
than the P to P position
AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK
• MODE 3: Driver side door is unlocked when the power supply position is changed from ON
SELECT
to OFF
• MODE 4*: Driver side door is unlocked when shifting the selector lever from any position
other than the P to P position
• MODE 5: Driver side door is unlocked when key out of key switch
• MODE 6: All doors are unlocked when key out of key switch
Automatic door lock/unlock function can be selected from the following in this mode
• Off: Non-operation
AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK
• Unlock Only: Door unlock operation only
SET
• Lock Only: Door lock operation only
• Lock/Unlock: Door lock and unlock operation
*: P range interlock door lock/unlock can be selected for M/T models, but automatic door lock/unlock function does not operate.

DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item Contents


IGN ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
KEY ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of key switch
CDL LOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door lock unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door lock unlock switch
DOOR SW-DR Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
DOOR SW-AS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicated [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH
BACK DOOR SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of back door switch
LOCK STATUS Indicated [On/Off] condition of front door driver side
ACC ON SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position
KEYLESS LOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from key fob
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from key fob
KEY CYL LK-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of lock signal from door key cylinder
KEY CYL UN-SW Indicated [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from door key cylinder
Display the vehicle speed signal received from combination meter by numer-
VEHICLE SPEED
ical value [Km/h]

ACTIVE TEST

Revision: 2011 October DLK-178 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Test item Description A


This test is able to check door lock/unlock operation
• The all door lock actuators are locked when “ALL LCK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The all door lock actuators are unlocked when “ALL UNLK” on CONSULT screen is touched
B
• The door lock actuator (driver side) is unlocked when “DR UNLK” on CONSULT screen is
DOOR LOCK
touched
• The back door lock actuator is unlocked when “BD ULK” on CONSULT screen is touched
• The door lock actuator (other) is unlocked when “OTR ULK” on CONSULT screen is C
touched

MULTI REMOTE ENT


D
MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)
INFOID:0000000007578979

E
DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item Condition


F
IGN ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ON position
KEY ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch
ACC ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch in ACC position G
KEYLESS LOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of lock signal from keyfob
KEYLESS UNLOCK Indicates [On/Off] condition of unlock signal from keyfob
H
NOTE:
KYLS TRNK/HAT
This item is displayed, but cannot be tested
DOOR SW-DR Indicates [On/Off] condition of front door switch (driver side)
I
DOOR SW-AS Indicates [On/Off] condition of front door switch (passenger side)
DOOR SW-RR Indicates [On/Off] condition of rear door switch RH
DOOR SW-RL Indicates [On/Off] condition of rear door switch LH J
BACK DOOR SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of back door switch
NOTE:
TRNK/HAT MNTR
This item is displayed, but cannot be tested DLK
CDL LOCK SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of door lock and unlock switch
CDL UNLOCK SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of door lock and unlock switch
L
KEYLESS PANIC Indicates [On/Off] condition of PANIC button of keyfob

ACTIVE TEST
M
Test item Description
This test is able to check interior room lamp operation
INT LAMP • On: Operate N
• Off: Non-operation
FLASHER This test is able to check flasher operation [LH/RH/Off]
This test is able to check horn operation O
HORN
• On: Operate

WORK SUPPORT P

Test item Description


REMO CONT IN REGIST Keyfob ID code can be registered
REMO CONT IN ERASUR Keyfob ID code can be erased
REMO CONT IN CONFIR It can be checked whether Intelligent Key ID code is registered or not in this mode

Revision: 2011 October DLK-179 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM (BCM)
< SYSTEM DESCRIPTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Test item Description
Hazard and horn reminder function (horn operation) mode can be changed in this mode
HORN CHIRP SET • On: Operate
• Off: Non-operation
Hazard and horn reminder function (hazard operation) mode can be changed in this mode
• MODE1: Non-operation
HAZARD LAMP SET • MODE2: Unlock operation only
• MODE3: Lock operation only
• MODE4: Lock and unlock operation
Auto door lock time can be changed in this mode
• MODE 1: Non-operation
• MODE 2: 30 sec
• MODE 3: 1 minute
AUTO LOCK SET
• MODE 4: 2 minute
• MODE 5: 3 minute
• MODE 6: 4 minute
• MODE 7: 5 minute
Panic alarm button pressing time on keyfob remote control button can be selected from the
following with this mode
PANIC ALARM SET • MODE1: 0.5 sec
• MODE2: Non-operation
• MODE3: 1.5 sec
NOTE:
TRUNK OPEN SET
This item is displayed, but cannot be tested

TRUNK
TRUNK : CONSULT Function (BCM - TRUNK) INFOID:0000000007578980

DATA MONITOR

Monitor Item Contents


KEY ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of key switch.
NOTE:
LOCK STATUS
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
VEHICLE SPEED Indicates [Km/h] condition of vehicle speed signal from combination meter.
IGN ON SW Indicates [On/Off] condition of ignition switch.
NOTE:
TRNK OPNR SW
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.
NOTE:
KYLS TRNK/HAT
This item is displayed, but cannot be monitored.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-180 2012 JUKE


BCM
< ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

ECU DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION A


BCM
List of ECU Reference INFOID:0000000007578981
B

ECU Reference
C
BCS-108, "Reference Value"
BCS-121, "Fail-safe"
BCM
BCS-122, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" D
BCS-122, "DTC Index"

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-181 2012 JUKE


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

WIRING DIAGRAM
DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram INFOID:0000000007578982

For connector terminal arrangements, harness layouts, and alphabets in a (option abbreviation; if not
described in wiring diagram), refer to GI-12, "Connector Information".

JRKWC1077GB

Revision: 2011 October DLK-182 2012 JUKE


DOOR & LOCK SYSTEM
< WIRING DIAGRAM > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DLK

JRKWC1078GB

Revision: 2011 October DLK-183 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BASIC INSPECTION
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
Work Flow INFOID:0000000007797636

OVERALL SEQUENCE

JMKIA8652GB

DETAILED FLOW

Revision: 2011 October DLK-184 2012 JUKE


DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

1.GET INFORMATION FOR SYMPTOM A


1. Get detailed information from the customer about the symptom (the condition and the environment when
the incident/malfunction occurs).
2. Check operation condition of the function that is malfunctioning.
B

>> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DTC C
1. Check DTC.
2. Perform the following procedure if DTC is detected.
- Record DTC and freeze frame data (Print them out using CONSULT.) D
- Erase DTC.
- Study the relationship between the cause detected by DTC and the symptom described by the customer.
3. Check related service bulletins for information. E
Are any symptoms described and any DTC detected?
Symptom is described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 3.
Symptom is described, DTC is not detected>>GO TO 4. F
Symptom is not described, DTC is detected>>GO TO 5.
3.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer. G
Also study the normal operation and fail-safe related to the symptom.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
H
>> GO TO 5.
4.CONFIRM THE SYMPTOM I
Try to confirm the symptom described by the customer.
Verify relation between the symptom and the condition when the symptom is detected.
J
>> GO TO 6.
5.PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for the detected DTC, and then check that DTC is detected DLK
again. At this time, always connect CONSULT to the vehicle, and check self diagnostic results in real time.
If two or more DTCs are detected, refer to BCS-122, "DTC Inspection Priority Chart" (BCM), and determine
trouble diagnosis order. L
NOTE:
• Freeze frame data is useful if the DTC is not detected.
• Perform Component Function Check if DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE is not included on Service
M
Manual. This simplified check procedure is an effective alternative though DTC cannot be detected during
this check.
If the result of Component Function Check is NG, it is the same as the detection of DTC by DTC CONFIR-
MATION PROCEDURE. N
Is DTC detected?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Check according to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident". O
6.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING SYSTEM BY SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS
Detect malfunctioning system according to SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS based on the confirmed symptom in step P
4, and determine the trouble diagnosis order based on possible causes and symptom.
Is the symptom described?
YES >> GO TO 7.
NO >> Monitor input data from related sensors or check voltage of related module terminals using CON-
SULT.
7.DETECT MALFUNCTIONING PART BY DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
Revision: 2011 October DLK-185 2012 JUKE
DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR WORK FLOW
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Inspect according to Diagnosis Procedure of the system.
Is malfunctioning part detected?
YES >> GO TO 8.
NO >> Check according to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
8.REPAIR OR REPLACE THE MALFUNCTIONING PART
1. Repair or replace the malfunctioning part.
2. Reconnect parts or connectors disconnected during Diagnosis Procedure again after repair and replace-
ment.
3. Check DTC. If DTC is detected, erase it.

>> GO TO 9.
9.FINAL CHECK
When DTC is detected in step 2, perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE again, and then check that the
malfunction is repaired securely.
When symptom is described by the customer, refer to confirmed symptom in step 3 or 4, and check that the
symptom is not detected.
Is DTC detected and does symptom remain?
YES-1 >> DTC is detected: GO TO 7.
YES-2 >> Symptom remains: GO TO 4.
NO >> Before returning the vehicle to the customer, always erase DTC.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-186 2012 JUKE


KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
A
Description INFOID:0000000007578984

Perform the following procedure after BCM is replaced or when new keyfob ID is registered B
NOTE:
When registering the keyfob ID, perform only one procedure to simultaneously register both ID (IMMOBI-
LIZER ID and keyfob ID).
C
Work Procedure INFOID:0000000007578985

1.STEP 1 D
Close all doors.

>> GO TO 2. E
2.STEP 2
Operate lock using the driver side door lock and unlock switch. F

>> GO TO 3.
3.STEP 3 G

1. Remove and insert the key into the ignition key 6 times within 10seconds (turning
the key switch from OFF to ON counts as 1 time).
2. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times). H
NOTE:
On the sixth key insertion, keep the key in the cylinder with the key switch ON.
Does the hazard lamp blink? I
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 1.
4.STEP 4 J

Within 3 seconds after the hazard lamp blinks, turn ignition switch to the ACC position
and operate lock using the driver side door lock and unlock switch.
DLK

>> GO TO 5.
5.STEP 5 L
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times). M
4. Key ID is registered.
Is key ID registered?
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6. N
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 1.
6.STEP 6 O
Operate lock using the driver side door lock and unlock switch.
P
>> GO TO 7.
7.STEP 7
1. Press the lock or unlock button of the keyfob to be added.
2. All doors unlock simultaneously.
3. Hazard warning lamp blinks(2 times).
4. Key ID is registered.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-187 2012 JUKE


KEYFOB ID REGISTRATION
< BASIC INSPECTION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is key ID registered?
YES-1 >> When adding a keyfob: GO TO 6.
YES-2 >> When ending registration: GO TO 8.
NO >> GO TO 6.
8.STEP 8
Open the front door driver side.

>> REGISTRATION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-188 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS A
BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578986
B

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF. C
2. Disconnect back door lock assembly connector.
3. Check voltage between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.
D
(+)
Voltage
Back door lock assembly (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal E
Back door
D106 1 Ground ON 12 V
opener switch
Is the inspection result normal? F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR CIRCUIT G

1. Disconnect BCM connector.


2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door lock assembly harness connector.
H
BCM Back door lock assembly
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
I
M65 50 D106 1 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.
J
BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 50 Not existed DLK

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation". L
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR GROUND CIRCUIT M
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Back door lock assembly


Continuity N
Connector Terminal Ground
D106 2 Existed
Is the inspection normal? O
YES >> Replace back door lock assembly.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-189 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578987

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “TRUNK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “TRNK OPNR SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Pressed ON
TRNK OPNR SW Back door opener switch
Released OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Back door opener switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-190, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578988

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPEN INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector.
3. Check signal between back door opener switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+)
Signal
Back door opener switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal

D107 1 Ground

JPMIA0012GB

Is the inspection result normal?


YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and back door opener switch harness connector.

BCM Back door opener switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 30 D107 1 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 30 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-190 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT A


Check continuity between back door opener switch harness connector and ground.

Back door opener switch


Continuity B
Connector Terminal Ground
D107 2 Existed
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH D

Refer to DLK-191, "Component Inspection".


Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT F
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

G
>> INSPECTION END
Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578989

H
1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect back door opener switch connector. I
3. Check continuity between back door opener switch terminals.

Back door opener switch J


Condition Continuity
Terminal

Back door opener Pressed Existed


1 2 DLK
switch Released Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END L
NO >> Replace back door opener switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-191 2012 JUKE


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578990

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEY CYL LK SW”, “KEY CYL UN-SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock ON
KEY CYL LK-SW
Neutral / Unlock OFF
Driver side door key cylinder
Unlock ON
KEY CYL UN-SW
Neutral / Lock OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door key cylinder switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-192, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578991

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage (V)
Front door lock assembly (driver side) (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal

5
D38 Ground

JPMIA0587GB

8.0 - 8.5 V
6 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
7 5
M65 D38 Existed
8 6
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-192 2012 JUKE


DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM A
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
7
M65 Not existed B
8
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation". C
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground. D

Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground E
D38 4 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH G
Refer to DLK-193, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
H
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT I
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END J

Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007578992

1.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH DLK

1. Turn ignition switch OFF.


2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) terminal. L
3. Check continuity between front door lock assembly (driver side) terminals.

Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Condition Continuity M
Terminal
Unlock Existed
5
Neutral / Lock Not existed N
4 Driver side door key cylinder
Lock Existed
6
Neutral / Unlock Not existed
O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-193 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
DRIVER SIDE
DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578993

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578994

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (driver side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (driver side) harness connector and ground.

(+)
Front door lock assembly Voltage
(–) Condition
(driver side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
D38 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
1 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (driver side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (driver side) harness
connector.

BCM Front door lock assembly (driver side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
56 2
M66 D38 Existed
69 1
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
56
M66 Not existed
69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-194 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL A


1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.
B
(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal C
56 Unlock
M66 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
69 Lock
D
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
E
PASSENGER SIDE
PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578995

F
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode. G
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status H


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
J
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578996

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL DLK


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect front door lock assembly (passenger side) connector.
3. Check voltage between front door lock assembly (passenger side) harness connector and ground. L

(+)
Front door lock assembly
(–) Condition
Voltage M
(passenger side) (Approx.)
Connector Terminal
6 Unlock N
D17 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
5 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
O
YES >> Replace front door lock assembly (passenger side).
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT P
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and front door lock assembly (passenger side) har-
ness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-195 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Front door lock assembly (passenger side)


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
68 6
M66 D17 Existed
69 5
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
68
M66 Not existed
69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
68 Unlock
M66 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
69 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
REAR LH
REAR LH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578997

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007578998

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly LH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly LH harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-196 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

(+) A
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly LH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
2 Unlock
B
D65 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
1 Lock
Is the inspection result normal? C
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly LH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT D
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly LH harness connector.
E
BCM Rear door lock assembly LH
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
68 2
F
M66 D65 Existed
69 1
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. G

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal H
Ground
68
M66 Not existed
69
I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
J
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground. DLK

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition L
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
68 Unlock
M66 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V M
69 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator. N
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
REAR RH
REAR RH : Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007578999
O

1.CHECK FUNCTION
P
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


ALL LOCK LOCK
DOOR LOCK Door lock actuators
ALL UNLK UNLOCK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-197 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock actuator is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure".
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579000

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INPUT SIGNAL


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect rear door lock assembly RH connector.
3. Check voltage between rear door lock assembly RH harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Rear door lock assembly RH (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
6 Unlock
D45 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
5 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace rear door lock assembly RH.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector and all door lock assembly connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and rear door lock assembly RH harness connector.

BCM Rear door lock assembly RH


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
68 6
M66 D45 Existed
69 5
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
68
M66 Not existed
69
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BCM OUTPUT SIGNAL
1. Connect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between BCM harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
BCM (–) Condition
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
68 Unlock
M66 Ground Door lock and unlock switch 12 V
69 Lock
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Check for internal short of each door lock actuator.
NO >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-198 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579001

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “CDL LOCK SW”, “CDL UNLOCK SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions. C

Monitor item Condition Status


Lock ON D
CDL LOCK SW
Unlock OFF
Door lock and unlock switch
Lock OFF
CDL UNLOCK SW E
Unlock ON
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door lock and unlock switch is OK. F
NO >> Refer to DLK-199, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579002

G
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector. H
3. Check signal between power window main switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.

(+) I
Signal
Power window main switch (–)
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
J
3

DLK
D35 Ground
15

L
JPMIA0012GB

1.0 - 1.5 V
Is the inspection result normal?
M
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH CIRCUIT N
1. Disconnect BCM connector and power window main switch connector.
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and power window main switch harness connector.
O
BCM Power window main switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
12 3 P
M65 D35 Existed
13 15
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-199 2012 JUKE


DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Ground
12
M65 Not existed
13
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-80, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH GROUND
Check continuity between power window main switch harness connector and ground.

Power window main switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D35 1 Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Refer to DLK-200, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace power window main switch. Refer to PWC-48, "Removal and Installation".
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007579003

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect power window main switch connector.
3. Check continuity between power window main switch terminals.

Power window main switch


Condition Continuity
Terminal
LOCK Existed
3
Door lock and unlock UNLOCK Not existed
1
switch LOCK Not existed
15
UNLOCK Existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace power window main switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-200 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579004

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR SW-DR”, “DOOR SW-AS”, “DOOR SW-RL”, “DOOR SW-RR”, “BACK DOOR SW” in
“DATA MONITOR” mode. C
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


D
Open On
DOOR SW-DR Driver side door
Closed Off
Open On E
DOOR SW-AS Passenger side door
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RL Rear door LH F
Closed Off
Open On
DOOR SW-RR Rear door RH
Closed Off G
Open On
DOOR SW-BK Back door
Closed Off
H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Door switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-201, "Diagnosis Procedure".
I
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579005

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH INPUT SIGNAL J


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check signal between malfunctioning door switch harness connector and ground using oscilloscope. DLK

(+)
Signal
Door switch (–) L
(Reference value)
Connector Terminal
Driver side B48
M
Passenger side B49
2
Rear LH B71
Rear RH B53 Ground N

Back door D106 3 PKIB4960J

7.0 - 8.0 V O
Is the inspection result normal?
YES-1 >> Back door: GO TO 3.
YES-2 >> Other door: GO TO 4. P
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK DOOR SWITCH CIRCUIT
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-201 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch BCM


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
Driver side B48 44
Passenger side B49 45
2
Rear LH B71 B10 43 Existed
Rear RH B53 42
Back door D106 3 47
3. Check continuity between door switch harness connector and ground.

Door switch
Continuity
Connector Terminal
Driver side B48
Passenger side B49 Ground
2
Rear LH B71 Not existed
Rear RH B53
Back door D106 3
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK BACK DOOR LOCK ASSEMBLY CIRCUIT
Check continuity between back door lock assembly harness connector and ground.

Back door switch


Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
D106 4 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Refer to DLK-202, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace malfunctioning door switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007579006

1.CHECK DOOR SWITCH


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect malfunctioning door switch connector.
3. Check continuity between door switch terminals.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-202 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Door switch A
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Pressed Existed
Driver side B
Released Not existed
Pressed Existed
Passenger side
Ground part of door Released Not existed C
2 Door switch
switch Pressed Existed
Rear LH
Released Not existed
Pressed Existed D
Rear RH
Released Not existed

Back door lock as- Lock Existed


Back door 3 4 E
sembly Unlock Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END F
NO >> Replace malfunction door switch.

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-203 2012 JUKE


HAZARD FUNCTION
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD FUNCTION
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579007

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “FLASHER” in “ACTIVE TEST” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Status


LH Front turn signal lamp LH Turns ON
FLASHER RH Front turn signal lamp RH Turns ON
OFF Front turn signal lamp Turns OFF
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Hazard warning lamp circuit is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-204, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579008

1.CHECK HAZARD SWITCH CIRCUIT


Refer to EXL-66, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END

Revision: 2011 October DLK-204 2012 JUKE


KEY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY SWITCH
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579009

B
1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEY ON SW” in “DATA MONITOR” mode. C
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status D


Inserted in key cylinder ON
KEY ON SW Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder OFF
E
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Key switch is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-205, "Diagnosis Procedure".
F
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579010

1.CHECK FUSE G
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Check 10 A fuse, [No.13, located in fuse block (J/B)].
Is fuse fusing? H
YES >> Replace the blown fuse after repairing the affected circuit if a fuse is blown.
NO >> GO TO 2.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT I

1. Disconnect key switch connector.


2. Check voltage between key switch harness connector and ground.
J
Key switch
Voltage
Connector Terminal Ground
DLK
M24 2 Battery voltage
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3. L
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH CIRCUIT
M
1. Disconnect BCM connector.
2. Check continuity between key switch harness connector and BCM harness connector.

Key switch BCM N


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M24 1 M65 37 Existed
O
3. Check continuity between key switch connector and ground.

Key switch
Continuity P
Connector Terminal Ground
M24 1 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-205 2012 JUKE


KEY SWITCH
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

4.CHECK KEY SWITCH


Refer to DLK-206, "Component Inspection".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace key switch.
5.CHECK INTERMITTENT INCIDENT
Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

>> INSPECTION END


Component Inspection INFOID:0000000007579011

COMPONENT INSPECTION
1.CHECK KEY SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect key switch connector.
3. Check continuity between key switch terminals.

Key switch
Condition Continuity
Terminal
Inserted in key cylinder Existed
1 2 Keyfob
Removed from key cylinder Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Replace key switch.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-206 2012 JUKE


KEYFOB BATTERY
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB BATTERY
A
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579012

1.CHECK FUNCTION B
Check door lock and unlock operation with keyfob button.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> Keyfob is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-207, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579013
D

1.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY


E
Check by connecting a resistance (approximately 300 Ω) so that the
current value becomes about 10 mA.
F
Standard : Approx. 2.5 - 3.0 V
Is the measurement value within the specification?
YES >> Replace keyfob. G
NO >> Replace keyfob battery.

H
OCC0607D

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-207 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
Component Function Check INFOID:0000000007579014

1.CHECK FUNCTION
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “KEYLESS ” or “KEYLESS UNLOCK” in “DATA MONITOR” mode.
3. Check that the function operates normally according to the following conditions.

Monitor item Condition Status


LOCK On
KEYLESS LOCK
UNLOCK Off
Keyfob button
LOCK Off
KEYLESS UNLOCK
UNLOCK On
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Remote keyless entry receiver is OK.
NO >> Refer to DLK-208, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579015

1.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Disconnect BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector.
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.

BCM Remote keyless entry receiver


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 18 M73 1 Existed
4. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 18 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY
1. Reconnect BCM connector.
2. Check voltage between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground.

(+)
Voltage
Remote keyless entry receiver (–)
(Approx.)
Connector Terminal
M73 4 Ground 5V
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> GO TO 3.
3.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 1
1. Disconnect BCM connector
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-208 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

BCM Remote keyless entry receiver A


Continuity
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 19 M73 4 Existed
B
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground.

BCM
Continuity C
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 19 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal? D
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
NO >> Repair or replace harness.
4.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER OUTPUT SIGNAL E
1. Reconnect remote keyless entry receiver connector.
2. Check signal between remote keyless entry receiver harness connector and ground using oscilloscope.
F
(+)
Signal
Remote keyless entry receiver (–) Condition
(Reference value) G
Connector Terminal

Waiting

JMKIA3838GB
M73 2 Ground
J

Press the Intelligent


Key lock or unlock DLK
button

JMKIA3841GB L
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Replace remote keyless entry receiver. M
5.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER CIRCUIT 2
1. Disconnect BCM connector and remote keyless entry receiver connector. N
2. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and remote keyless entry receiver harness connector.

BCM Remote keyless entry receiver


Continuity O
Connector Terminal Connector Terminal
M65 20 M73 2 Existed
3. Check continuity between BCM harness connector and ground. P

BCM
Continuity
Connector Terminal Ground
M65 20 Not existed
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-209 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< DTC/CIRCUIT DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
NO >> Repair or replace harness.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-210 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS A
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK
SWITCH
B
ALL DOOR
ALL DOOR : Description INFOID:0000000007579016
C
All doors do not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579017
D
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
Check door lock and unlock switch. E
Refer to DLK-199, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. F
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side). G
Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
H
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM I
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? J
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
DRIVER SIDE DLK

DRIVER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007579018

Driver side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch. L

DRIVER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579019

M
1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
Check front door lock assembly (driver side).
Refer to DLK-194, "DRIVER SIDE : Component Function Check". N
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. O
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. P
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
PASSENGER SIDE

Revision: 2011 October DLK-211 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
PASSENGER SIDE : Description INFOID:0000000007579020

Passenger side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
PASSENGER SIDE : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579021

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check front door lock assembly (passenger side).
Refer to DLK-195, "PASSENGER SIDE : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
REAR LH
REAR LH : Description INFOID:0000000007579022

Rear LH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR LH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579023

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check rear door lock assembly LH.
Refer to DLK-196, "REAR LH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
REAR RH
REAR RH : Description INFOID:0000000007579024

Rear RH side door does not lock/unlock using door lock and unlock switch.
REAR RH : Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579025

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR


Check rear door lock assembly RH
Refer to DLK-197, "REAR RH : Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-212 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal? A
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
B

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-213 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERATION
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH DOOR KEY CYLINDER OPERA-
TION
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579026

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to DLK-211, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH
Check door key cylinder switch.
Refer to DLK-192, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-214 2012 JUKE


DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR DOES NOT LOCK/UNLOCK WITH KEYFOB
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579027

1.CHECK POWER DOOR LOCK OPERATION B


Check power door lock operation.
Does door lock/unlock with door lock and unlock switch?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Go to DLK-211, "ALL DOOR : Diagnosis Procedure".
2.CHECK REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER D
Check remote keyless entry receiver.
Refer to DLK-208, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? E
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK DOOR KEY CYLINDER SWITCH F
Check door key cylinder switch.
Refer to DLK-192, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? G
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
H
4.CHECK DOOR SWITCH
Check door switch.
Refer to DLK-201, "Component Function Check". I
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. J
5.CHECK KEYFOB BATTERY
Check keyfob battery.
Refer to DLK-207, "Component Function Check". DLK
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 6.
L
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
6.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation". M
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END N
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-215 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR DOES NOT OPENED
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579028

1.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER SWITCH


Check back door opener switch.
Refer to DLK-190, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK BACK DOOR OPENER ACTUATOR
Check back door opener actuator.
Refer to DLK-189, "Diagnosis Procedure".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL
Check vehicle speed signal.
Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-216 2012 JUKE


SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SELECTIVE UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579029

1.CHECK “DOOR LOCK–UNLOCK SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” C
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2 D
NO >> Set “DOOR LOCK-UNLOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”
2.REPLACE BCM
E
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-217 2012 JUKE


VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING AUTO LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579030

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Lock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “VH SPD” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT”.
3.REPLACE BCM
• Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
• Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-218 2012 JUKE


IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
IGN OFF INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579031

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. G
3.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation". H
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END I
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-219 2012 JUKE


P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPER-
ATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
P RANGE INTERLOCK DOOR LOCK/UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OP-
ERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579032

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Set “Unlock Only”, “Lock Only” or “Lock/Unlock” in “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “P RANGE” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCK SELECT”.
3.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” setting in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Set “MODE 2” or “MODE 4” in “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT”.
4.CHECK TCM
Check TCM for DTC.
Refer to TM-116, "DTC Index".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 5.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
5.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-220 2012 JUKE


AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
AUTO DOOR LOCK OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579033

1.CHECK “AUTO LOCK SET” SETTING WITH CONSULT B


1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-179, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “AUTO LOCK SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.REPLACE BCM
E
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
F
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-221 2012 JUKE


UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
UNLOCK LINK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579034

1.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-222 2012 JUKE


KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY OUT INTERLOCK DOOR UNLOCK FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579035

1.CHECK “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” B


1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. C
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2. D
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC LOCK/UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
2.CHECK “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT”
E
1. Select “DOOR LOCK” of “BCM” using CONSULT.
2. Select “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode.
3. Check “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-177, "DOOR LOCK : CONSULT Function (BCM - DOOR LOCK)". F
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “AUTOMATIC DOOR UNLOCK SELECT” in “WORK SUPPORT”. G
3.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch. H
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts. I
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement. J
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident". DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-223 2012 JUKE


KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEY REMINDER FUNCTION DOES NOT OPERATE
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579036

1.CHECK DOOR LOCK AND UNLOCK SWITCH


Check door lock and unlock switch.
Refer to DLK-199, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
2.CHECK KEY SWITCH
Check key switch.
Refer to DLK-205, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
3.CHECK DRIVER SIDE DOOR SWITCH
Check driver side door switch.
Refer to DLK-201, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal?
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM
1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".
2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-224 2012 JUKE


HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HAZARD REMINDER OPERATION DOES NOT OPERATE
A
Diagnosis Procedure INFOID:0000000007579037

1.CHECK DTC WITH BCM AND COMBINATION METER B


Check that DTC is not detected with BCM and combination meter.
Is the inspection result normal?
C
YES >> GO TO 2.
NO-1 >> Refer to BCS-122, "DTC Index". (BCM)
NO-2 >> Refer to MWI-31, "DTC Index". (Combination meter)
2.CHECK “HAZARD LAMP SET” SETTING IN “WORK SUPPORT” D

1. Select “MULTI REMOTE ENT” of “BCM” using CONSULT.


2. Select “HAZARD LAMP SET” in “WORK SUPPORT” mode. E
3. Check “HAZARD LAMP SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
Refer to DLK-179, "MULTI REMOTE ENT : CONSULT Function (BCM - MULTI REMOTE ENT)".
Is the inspection result normal?
F
YES >> GO TO 3.
NO >> Set “HAZARD LAMP SET” in “WORK SUPPORT”.
3.CHECK HAZARD WARNING LAMP G
Check hazard warning lamp.
Refer to DLK-204, "Component Function Check".
Is the inspection result normal? H
YES >> GO TO 4.
NO >> Repair or replace the malfunctioning parts.
4.REPLACE BCM I

1. Replace BCM. Refer to BCS-141, "Removal and Installation".


2. Confirm the operation after replacement.
J
Is the result normal?
YES >> INSPECTION END
NO >> Check intermittent incident. Refer to GI-43, "Intermittent Incident".
DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-225 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
Work Flow INFOID:0000000007579038

SBT842

CUSTOMER INTERVIEW
Interview the customer if possible, to determine the conditions that exist when the noise occurs. Use the Diag-
nostic Worksheet during the interview to document the facts and conditions when the noise occurs and any of
customer's comments; refer to DLK-230, "Diagnostic Worksheet". This information is necessary to duplicate
the conditions that exist when the noise occurs.
• The customer may not be able to provide a detailed description or the location of the noise. Attempt to obtain
all the facts and conditions that exist when the noise occurs (or does not occur).
• If there is more than one noise in the vehicle, perform a diagnosis and repair the noise that the customer is
concerned about. This can be accomplished by performing a cruise test on the vehicle with the customer.
• After identifying the type of noise, isolate the noise in terms of its characteristics. The noise characteristics
are provided so the customer, service adviser and technician are all speaking the same language when
defining the noise.
• Squeak – (Like tennis shoes on a clean floor)
Squeak characteristics include the light contact/fast movement/brought on by road conditions/hard surfaces
= higher pitch noise/softer surfaces = lower pitch noises/edge to surface = chirping
• Creak – (Like walking on an old wooden floor)
Creak characteristics include firm contact/slow movement/twisting with a rotational movement/pitch depen-
dent on materials/often brought on by activity.
• Rattle – (Like shaking a baby rattle)
Rattle characteristics include the fast repeated contact/vibration or similar movement/loose parts/missing
clip or fastener/incorrect clearance.
• Knock – (Like a knock on a door)
Knock characteristics include hollow sounding/sometimes repeating/often brought on by driver action.
• Tick – (Like a clock second hand)
Tick characteristics include gentle contacting of light materials/loose components/can be caused by driver
action or road conditions.
• Thump – (Heavy, muffled knock noise)
Thump characteristics include softer knock/dead sound often brought on by activity.
• Buzz – (Like a bumblebee)
Buzz characteristics include high frequency rattle/firm contact.
• Often the degree of acceptable noise level will vary depending up on the person. A noise that a technician
may judge as acceptable may be very irritating to the customer.
• Weather conditions, especially humidity and temperature, may have a great effect on noise level.
DUPLICATE THE NOISE AND TEST DRIVE
If possible, drive the vehicle with the customer until the noise is duplicated. Note any additional information on
the Diagnostic Worksheet regarding the conditions or location of the noise. This information can be used to
duplicate the same conditions when the repair is reconfirmed.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-226 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the noise can be duplicated easily during the test drive, to help identify the source of the noise, try to dupli-
cate the noise with the vehicle stopped by doing one or all of the following: A
1) Close a door.
2) Tap or push/pull around the area where the noise appears to be coming from.
3) Rev the engine.
B
4) Use a floor jack to recreate vehicle “twist”.
5) At idle, apply engine load (electrical load, half-clutch on M/T models, drive position on A/T models).
6) Raise the vehicle on a hoist and hit a tire with a rubber hammer.
• Drive the vehicle and attempt to duplicate the conditions the customer states exist when the noise occurs. C
• If it is difficult to duplicate the noise, drive the vehicle slowly on an undulating or rough road to stress the
vehicle body.
CHECK RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS D
After verifying the customer concern or symptom, check ASIST for Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) related
to that concern or symptom.
If a TSB relates to the symptom, follow the procedure to repair the noise. E
LOCATE THE NOISE AND IDENTIFY THE ROOT CAUSE
1. Narrow down the noise to a general area. To help pinpoint the source of the noise, use a listening tool
(Chassis ear: J-39570, Engine ear and mechanics stethoscope). F
2. Narrow down the noise to a more specific area and identify the cause of the noise by:
• Removing the components in the area that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not use too much force when removing clips and fasteners, otherwise clips and fastener can be broken G
or lost during the repair, resulting in the creation of new noise.
• Tapping or pushing/pulling the component that is are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
Do not tap or push/pull the component with excessive force, otherwise the noise will be eliminated only tem- H
porarily.
• Feeling for a vibration by hand by touching the component(s) that is are suspected to be the cause of the
noise.
I
• Placing a piece of paper between components that are suspected to be the cause of the noise.
• Looking for loose components and contact marks.
Refer to DLK-228, "Inspection Procedure".
J
REPAIR THE CAUSE
• If the cause is a loose component, tighten the component securely.
• If the cause is insufficient clearance between components:
- Separate components by repositioning or loosening and retightening the component, if possible. DLK
- Insulate components with a suitable insulator such as urethane pads, foam blocks, felt cloth tape or ure-
thane tape. A Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) is available through the authorized Nissan Parts
Department. L
CAUTION:
Never use excessive force as many components are constructed of plastic and may be damaged.
NOTE:
Always check with the Parts Department for the latest parts information. M
The following materials are contained in the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980). Each item can be
ordered separately as needed.
URETHANE PADS [1.5 mm (0.059 in) thick] N
Insulates connectors, harness, etc.
76268-9E005: 100 × 135 mm (3.94 × 5.31 in)/76884-71L01: 60 × 85 mm (2.36 × 3.35 in)/76884-
71L02:15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in)
INSULATOR (Foam blocks) O
Insulates components from contact. Can be used to fill space behind a panel.
73982-9E000: 45 mm (1.77 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in)/73982-
50Y00: 10 mm (0.39 in) thick, 50 × 50 mm (1.97 × 1.97 in) P
INSULATOR (Light foam block)
80845-71L00: 30 mm (1.18 in) thick, 30 × 50 mm (1.18 × 1.97 in)
FELT CLOTHTAPE
Used to insulate where movement does not occur. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
68370-4B000: 15 × 25 mm (0.59 × 0.98 in) pad/68239-13E00: 5 mm (0.20 in) wide tape roll
The following materials, not found in the kit, can also be used to repair squeaks and rattles.
UHMW (TEFLON) TAPE

Revision: 2011 October DLK-227 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Insulates where slight movement is present. Ideal for instrument panel applications.
SILICONE GREASE
Used in place of UHMW tape that is be visible or does not fit. Will only last a few months.
SILICONE SPRAY
Used when grease cannot be applied.
DUCT TAPE
Used to eliminate movement.
CONFIRM THE REPAIR
Confirm that the cause of a noise is repaired by test driving the vehicle. Operate the vehicle under the same
conditions as when the noise originally occurred. Refer to the notes on the Diagnostic Worksheet.
Inspection Procedure INFOID:0000000007579039

Refer to Table of Contents for specific component removal and installation information.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Most incidents are caused by contact and movement between:
1. The cluster lid A and instrument panel
2. Acrylic lens and combination meter housing
3. Instrument panel to front pillar garnish
4. Instrument panel to windshield
5. Instrument panel mounting pins
6. Wiring harnesses behind the combination meter
7. A/C defroster duct and duct joint
These incidents can usually be located by tapping or moving the components to duplicate the noise or by
pressing on the components while driving to stop the noise. Most of these incidents can be repaired by
applying felt cloth tape or silicon spray (in hard to reach areas). Urethane pads can be used to insulate
wiring harness.
CAUTION:
Never use silicone spray to isolate a squeak or rattle. If the area is saturated with silicone, the
recheck of repair becomes impossible.
CENTER CONSOLE
Components to pay attention to include:
1. Shifter assembly cover to finisher
2. A/C control unit and cluster lid C
3. Wiring harnesses behind audio and A/C control unit
The instrument panel repair and isolation procedures also apply to the center console.
DOORS
Pay attention to the following:
1. Finisher and inner panel making a slapping noise
2. Inside handle escutcheon to door finisher
3. Wiring harnesses tapping
4. Door striker out of alignment causing a popping noise on starts and stops
Tapping or moving the components or pressing on them while driving to duplicate the conditions can isolate
many of these incidents. The areas can usually be insulated with felt cloth tape or insulator foam blocks from
the Nissan Squeak and Rattle Kit (J-43980) to repair the noise.
TRUNK
Trunk noises are often caused by a loose jack or loose items put into the trunk by the customer.
In addition look for the following:
1. Trunk lid dumpers out of adjustment
2. Trunk lid striker out of adjustment
3. The trunk lid torsion bars knocking together
4. A loose license plate or bracket

Revision: 2011 October DLK-228 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Most of these incidents can be repaired by adjusting, securing or insulating the item(s) or component(s) caus-
ing the noise. A
SUNROOF/HEADLINING
Noises in the sunroof/headlining area can often be traced to one of the following:
1. Sunroof lid, rail, linkage or seals making a rattle or light knocking noise B
2. Sunvisor shaft shaking in the holder
3. Front or rear windshield touching headlining and squeaking
C
Again, pressing on the components to stop the noise while duplicating the conditions can isolate most of these
incidents. Repairs usually consist of insulating with felt cloth tape.
SEATS D
When isolating seat noise it's important to note the position the seats in and the load placed on the seat when
the noise occurs. These conditions should be duplicated when verifying and isolating the cause of the noise.
Cause of seat noise include: E
1. Headrest rods and holder
2. A squeak between the seat pad cushion and frame
3. The rear seatback lock and bracket F
These noises can be isolated by moving or pressing on the suspected components while duplicating the con-
ditions under which the noise occurs.Most of these incidents can be repaired by repositioning the component
or applying urethane tape to the contact area. G
UNDERHOOD
Some interior noise may be caused by components under the hood or on the engine wall. The noise is then
transmitted into the passenger compartment. H
Causes of transmitted underhood noise include:
1. Any component mounted to the engine wall
2. Components that pass through the engine wall I
3. Engine wall mounts and connectors
4. Loose radiator mounting pins
5. Hood bumpers out of adjustment J
6. Hood striker out of adjustment
These noises can be difficult to isolate since they cannot be reached from the interior of the vehicle. The best
method is to secure, move or insulate one component at a time and test drive the vehicle. Also, engine RPM DLK
or load can be changed to isolate the noise. Repairs can usually be made by moving, adjusting, securing, or
insulating the component causing the noise.
L

Revision: 2011 October DLK-229 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Diagnostic Worksheet INFOID:0000000007579040

PIIB8740E

Revision: 2011 October DLK-230 2012 JUKE


SQUEAK AND RATTLE TROUBLE DIAGNOSES
< SYMPTOM DIAGNOSIS > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

DLK

PIIB8742E

Revision: 2011 October DLK-231 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION


HOOD
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579041

JMKIA6518ZZ

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Radiator core seal


4. Hood insulator 5. Hood bumper rubber 6. Grommet
7. Clamp 8. Hood support rod 9. Hood hinge
: Clip

: Pawl
: Body grease

HOOD ASSEMBLY
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579042

CAUTION:
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL
1. Support hood assembly with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported by the proper material when removing hood
assembly.
2. Remove hood hinge mounting nuts on the hood to remove the hood assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-232 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting bolts
and nuts. B
• After installing, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-233, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007579043 C

DLK

JMKIA5626GB N

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp
O
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease P

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-233 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Unit: mm (in)
Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
Hood – Front E Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
A–A
bumper fascia F Surface height (-2.0) – (+2.0) [(-0.079) – (+0.079)] < 2.5 (0.098)
Hood – Front combi-
B–B G Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
Hood – Front combi-
C–C H Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
I Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 (0.098 – 0.177) < 1.5 (0.059)
Hood – Front fender D–D
J Surface height (-2.0) – (0.0) [(-0.079) – (0.000)] < 1.5 (0.059)

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove hood lock assembly, and then adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly,
and front combination lamp according to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber.
3. Position hood lock assembly and engage hood striker. Check hood lock assembly and hood striker for
looseness.
4. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of hood striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
5. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
6. Open hood. Rotate bumper rubber counterclockwise between half a turn and three-quarters of a turn.
7. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with secondary hood striker from the dead load of the
hood assembly.
8. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary hood striker when hood assembly is closed
[free-fall from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
9. Install front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
HOOD HINGE
HOOD HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579044

REMOVAL
1. Remove hood assembly. Refer to DLK-232, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood hinge mounting bolts, and then remove hood hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and then install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, perform hood hinge fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-235, "HOOD HINGE : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-234 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check hood hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply grease. A

JMKIA5721ZZ

D
HOOD HINGE : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007579045

DLK

O
JMKIA5626GB

1. Hood assembly 2. Hood bumper rubber 3. Hood hinge


4. Hood lock assembly 5. Front bumper fascia 6. Front combination lamp P
7. Front fender
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between hood and each part by visually and touching.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-235 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)
Difference
Portion Standard (RH/LH,
MAX)
Hood – Front E Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
A–A
bumper fascia F Surface height (-2.0) – (+2.0) [(-0.079) – (+0.079)] < 2.5 (0.098)
Hood – Front combi-
B–B G Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
Hood – Front combi-
C–C H Clearance 2.0 – 6.0 (0.079 – 0.236) < 2.5 (0.098)
nation lamp
I Clearance 2.5 – 4.5 (0.098 – 0.177) < 1.5 (0.059)
Hood – Front fender D–D
J Surface height (-2.0) – (0.0) [(-0.079) – (0.000)] < 1.5 (0.059)
1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove hood lock assembly.
3. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
5. Remove front fender assembly (LH and RH). Refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
6. Loosen hood hinge mounting bolts.
7. Temporarily install front fender assembly (LH and RH), front combination lamp (LH and RH) and front
bumper fascia.
8. Adjust the clearance of hood assembly, front fender assembly (LH and RH), front combination lamp (LH
and RH) and front bumper fascia according to the specified value, by moving hood hinge (body side).
9. Temporarily tighten hood hinge (LH and RH).
10. Remove front bumper fascia, front combination lamp (LH and RH) and front fender assembly (LH and
RH).
11. Tighten hood hinge (LH and RH) to the specified torque.
12. Install front fender assembly (LH and RH). Refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
13. Install front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
14. Install front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
15. Adjust the surface height of hood assembly, front fender assembly, and front combination lamp according
to the specified value, by rotating hood bumper rubber.
16. Position hood lock assembly and engage hood striker. Check hood lock assembly and hood striker for
looseness.
17. Move hood lock assembly laterally until the center of hood striker and hood lock assembly are vertical
when viewed from the front.
18. After adjustment, tighten lock bolts to the specified torque.
19. Open hood. Rotate bumper rubber counterclockwise between half a turn and three-quarters of a turn.
20. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with secondary hood striker from the dead load of the
hood assembly.
21. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary hood striker when hood assembly is closed
[free-fall from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height].
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
22. Install front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the heads of hood hinge mounting
bolts and nuts.
HOOD SUPPORT ROD

Revision: 2011 October DLK-236 2012 JUKE


HOOD
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579046

A
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Two workers are required to support the hood. B
1. Support hood assembly with a suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Injury may occur if hood assembly is not supported by the proper material when removing hood C
assembly.
2. Pull hood support rod from grommet and remove.
D
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-237 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579047

JMKIA6519GB

1. Radiator core support upper 2. Air guide (RH) 3. Radiator core support lower
4. Air guide (LH)
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579048

RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT UPPER


Removal
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front combination lamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove headlamp (LH and RH). Refer to EXL-81, "Removal and Installation".
4. Disconnect crash zone sensor harness connector. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
CAUTION:
Turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and then wait for at least 3 minutes.
5. Remove hood lock and hood lock cable fixing clip. Refer to DLK-262, "HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE :
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove horn bracket. Refer to HRN-4, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-238 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
7. Remove upper fixing clips (2) of air guide (LH and RH) (1).
A

JMKIA6023ZZ

D
8. Remove hood support rod. Refer to DLK-237, "HOOD SUPPORT ROD : Removal and Installation".
9. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support upper.
Installation E
Install in the reverse order of removal.
RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT LOWER
F
Removal
1. Remove front bumper fascia. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove lower fixing clips (2) of radiator side seal (LH and RH) G
(1).

JMKIA6024ZZ
J

3. Using strings (A), hang inlet hose (1) and inlet hose (2) together
with charge air cooler. DLK
CAUTION:
Never damage inlet hoses and charge air cooler.
L

JMKIA6025ZZ

N
4. Support lower side radiator using wooden blocks (A) and a floor
jack (B).
CAUTION:
Never damage radiator. O

JMKIA6026ZZ

5. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove radiator core support lower.
Installation

Revision: 2011 October DLK-239 2012 JUKE


RADIATOR CORE SUPPORT
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-240 2012 JUKE


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT FENDER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579049

G
JMKIA5632ZZ

1. Front fender assembly 2. Front fender stiffener


H
: Vehicle front

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579050

I
REMOVAL
1. Remove front fillet molding. Refer to EXT-25, "FRONT FILLET MOLDING : Removal and Installation".
J
2. Remove front bumper fascia assembly. Refer to EXT-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove sill cover. Refer to EXT-22, "Removal and Installation".
4. Remove fender protector. Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation". DLK
5. Remove front fender cover. Refer to EXT-21, "Exploded View".
6. Remove front combination lamp. Refer to EXL-83, "Removal and Installation".
7. Remove side turn signal lamp. Refer to EXL-90, "Removal and Installation". L
8. Remove mounting bolts of front fender assembly.
9. Remove front fender stiffener (2) from the vehicle body while
carefully pulling upper portion of front fender (1) toward vehicle M
outside.

: Vehicle front N

JMKIA5633ZZ

P
10. Remove front fender assembly.
CAUTION:
An viscous urethane foam is installed on the back surface of front fender. When removing the
front fender, be careful to not deform the front fender while performing the procedure and remov-
ing the viscous urethane foam a little at a time.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-241 2012 JUKE


FRONT FENDER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of front fender mounting
bolts.
• After installation, adjust the following part.
- Hood assembly: Refer to DLK-233, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
- Front door: Refer to DLK-245, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-242 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579051

I
JMKIA5877GB

1. Front door panel 2. Grommet 3. TORX bolt J


4. Door striker 5. Door pad 6. Bumper rubber
7. Door check link 8. Door hinge (lower) 9. Door hinge (upper)
10. Grommet DLK
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)


L
: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease
M
DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579052
N

WARNING:
• Before servicing, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect battery negative terminal and wait 3 minutes
or more. O
• Never use the air tools or electric tools for servicing.
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight. P
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL

Revision: 2011 October DLK-243 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Disconnect front door harness connector.

JMKIA5878ZZ

2. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.


3. Remove door hinge mounting bolts (door side), and then remove door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-245, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-244 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007579053

DLK

JMKIA5638GB

L
1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door
4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower) M
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)


N
: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures O
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)
Portion Clearance Surface height P
Front fender – Front door A–A 3.0 – 5.0 (0.118 – 0.197) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.3 – 5.3 (0.130 – 0.209) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-245 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Adjust the surface height of front door according to the fitting standard dimension.
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting bolts on body side.
6. Raise front door at rear end to adjust clearance of the front door according to the fitting standard dimen-
sion.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install front fender. Refer to refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction.
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579054

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-245, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579055

REMOVAL
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of its heavy weight.
• When removing and installing front door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
1. Remove front fender. Refer to DLK-241, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove front door assembly. Refer to DLK-243, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove front door hinge mounting bolts (body side), and then remove front door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check front door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-245, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-246 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease. A

: Grease up point
B

JMKIA5641ZZ

D
DOOR CHECK LINK
DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579056

E
REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door window.
F
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".
3. Disconnect harness connector of front door speaker.
4. Remove mounting bolts of front door speaker, and then remove front door speaker. G
5. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.
6. Remove mounting bolts of door check link on door panel.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2). H

JMKIA5879ZZ DLK
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: L
• Check front door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease. M

: Grease up point

JMKIA5642ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-247 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579057

JMKIA5880GB

1. Rear door panel 2. TORX bolt 3. Door striker


4. Door check link 5. Door hinge (lower) 6. Door hinge (upper)
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR ASSEMBLY
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579058

CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro-
tect door and body.
REMOVAL

Revision: 2011 October DLK-248 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
1. Remove rear door harness grommet (2) from body side outer
(1), and then pull out rear door harness. A

JMKIA5881ZZ

D
2. Disconnect rear door harness connector.

G
JMKIA5882ZZ

3. Remove mounting bolt of door check link on the vehicle.


H
4. Remove door hinge mounting bolts (door side), and then remove rear door assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. I
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. J
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-250, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts. DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-249 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007579059

JMKIA5638GB

1. Front fender 2. Front door 3. Rear door


4. Body side outer 5. Door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Front door hinge 8. Rear door hinge (upper) 9. Rear door hinge (lower)
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and surface height between front door and each part by visually and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)
Portion Clearance Surface height
Front door – Rear door B–B 3.3 – 5.3 (0.130 – 0.209) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
Rear door – Body side outer C–C 2.6 – 4.6 (0.102 – 0.181) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-250 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
3. Adjust the surface height of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension. A
4. Temporarily tighten door hinge mounting nuts on door side.
5. Loosen door hinge mounting nuts and bolts on body side.
B
6. Raise rear door at rear end to adjust clearance of rear door according to the fitting standard dimension.
7. After adjustment tighten bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
CAUTION:
• After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of hinge mounting bolts C
and nuts.
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
8. Install center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal and D
Installation".
DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust door striker so that it becomes parallel with door lock insertion direction. E
DOOR STRIKER
DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579060 F

REMOVAL
Remove TORX bolts, and then remove door striker. G
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: H
• Check rear door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
• After installation, be sure to perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-250, "DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment". I
DOOR HINGE
DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579061
J
CAUTION:
• Perform work with 2 workers, because of it’s heavy weight.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, support door with a jack and shop cloth to pro- DLK
tect door and body.
REMOVAL
L
1. Remove rear door assembly. Refer to DLK-248, "DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove center pillar lower garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
M
3. Remove rear door hinge mounting bolts and nuts (body side), and then remove door hinge.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• When removing and installing rear door assembly, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-250, O
"DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment".
• After installing, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of door hinge mounting nuts.
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-251 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If neces-
sary, apply body grease.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5641ZZ

DOOR CHECK LINK


DOOR CHECK LINK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579062

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the rear door window.
2. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove mounting bolts of rear door speaker, and then remove rear door speaker.
4. Disconnect harness connector of rear door speaker.
5. Remove mounting bolt of the check link on the vehicle.
6. Remove mounting bolts of the check link on door panel.
7. Take door check link (1) out from the hole of door panel (2).

JMKIA5879ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check rear door open/close operation after installation.
• Check door check link rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply grease.

: Grease up point

JMKIA5642ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-252 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579063

REMOVAL B

JMKIA5652ZZ
J
1. Back door weather-strip 2. Back door stay 3. Back door stay lower bracket
4. Bumper rubber 5. Back door striker 6. Back door panel
7. Back door hinge 8. Hole cover DLK
A : Center mark B : Seam
: Do not reuse
L
: Body grease

BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY


M
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579064

CAUTION: N
• Operate with two workers, because of its heavy weight.
• Use protective tape or shop cloth to protect from damage during removal and installation.
REMOVAL O
1. Remove luggage side upper finisher (LH and RH). Refer to INT-35, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FINISHER
: Removal and Installation".
P

Revision: 2011 October DLK-253 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Disconnect harness connector.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5653ZZ

3. Remove rear washer hose (1) from hose mounting clip (A), and
then disengage hose.

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5654ZZ

4. Remove center pillar upper garnish. Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR UPPER GARNISH : Removal
and Installation".
5. Remove upper side of back door weather-strip. Refer to DLK-259, "BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP :
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove rear assist grip (LH and RH) and mounting clips for rear portion of headlining, and then remove
rear portion of headlining. Refer to INT-26, "NORMAL ROOF : Exploded View" or INT-29, "SUNROOF :
Removal and Installation".
7. Remove ground harness mounting bolt (A) and harness fixing
clips (B).

: Vehicle front

JMKIA5655ZZ

8. Remove grommet (1), and then pull out harness from roof panel
(2).

JMKIA5657ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-254 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
9. Remove grommet (2), and then pull out harness and washer
tube from roof panel (1). A

JMKIA5658ZZ

D
10. Support back door with the proper material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the E
back door stay.
11. Remove back door stay (back door side). Refer to DLK-258, "BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installa-
tion".
F
12. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts on back door and remove back door assembly.

INSTALLATION G
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If necessary, apply body grease.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation. H
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-256, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
I

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-255 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Adjustment INFOID:0000000007802620

JMKIA9210GB

1. Back door assembly 2. Bumper rubber (upper) 3. Bumper rubber (lower)


4. Back door hinge 5. Back door striker 6. TORX bolt
7. Roof panel 8. Rear combination lamp 9. Back door glass
10. Rear bumper fascia
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease

Check the clearance and the surface height between back door and each part by seeing and touching.
If the clearance and the surface height are out of specification, adjust them according to the procedures
shown below.
Unit: mm (in)

Difference
Portion Standard
(LH/RH, MAX)
Roof panel – Back D Clearance 5.0 – 7.0 (0.197 – 0.276) —
A–A
door E Surface height 0.9 – 2.9 (0.035 – 0.114) —

Revision: 2011 October DLK-256 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]

Difference
Portion Standard A
(LH/RH, MAX)
Rear combination
lamp – Back door B–B F Clearance 2.8 – 7.2 (0.110 – 0.283) <2.0 (0.079)
B
glass
Rear bumper fas- G Clearance 6.0 – 10.0 (0.236 – 0.394) —
C–C
cia – Back door H Surface height (-2.5) – (+1.0) [(-0.098) – (+0.039)] — C

FITTING ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE


1. Loosen back door striker mounting bolts. D
2. Loosen back door hinge mounting nuts (back door side).
3. Adjust back door using back door striker and back door hinge to the specified value, as shown in the fol-
lowing table. E
4. After adjustment tighten back door striker mounting bolts and back door hinge mounting nuts (back door
side) to the specified torque.
5. Screw bumper rubber (upper) into the stopper position (A), and F
then loosen by a half turn.
6. Screw bumper rubber (lower) into the end position of threads.
G

JMKIA5843ZZ I

CAUTION:
After installation, apply touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of back door hinge mounting J
nuts.
BACK DOOR STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
Adjust back door striker so that it becomes parallel with back door lock insertion direction. DLK
BACK DOOR STRIKER
BACK DOOR STRIKER : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579066
L

REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage rear plate. Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE REAR PLATE : Removal and Installation". M
2. Remove TORX bolts, and then remove back door striker.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. N
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-256, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : O
Adjustment".
BACK DOOR HINGE
P
BACK DOOR HINGE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579067

REMOVAL
1. Remove back door assembly. Refer to DLK-253, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove back door hinge mounting nuts (body side), and then remove back door hinge.
INSTALLATION

Revision: 2011 October DLK-257 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, perform the fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-256, "BACK DOOR ASSEMBLY :
Adjustment".
• Check back door hinge rotating part for poor lubrication. If
necessary, apply body grease.

JMKIA5659ZZ

BACK DOOR STAY


BACK DOOR STAY : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579068

REMOVAL
1. Remove luggage side upper finisher and rear pillar cap. Refer to INT-35, "LUGGAGE SIDE UPPER FIN-
ISHER : Removal and Installation".
2. Support the back door with the suitable material to prevent it from falling.
WARNING:
Bodily injury may occur if no supporting rod is holding the back door open when removing the
back door stay.
3. Remove back door stay mounting bolts (body side).
4. Remove the metal clip (3) located on the connection between
the back door stay (1) and the stud ball (2) (back door side) by
using a flat-bladed screwdriver (A).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage painted surface.
5. Remove back door stay (back door side).

JMKIA2255ZZ

6. Remove mounting bolts, and then remove back door stay lower bracket.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Apply anticorrosive agent onto the mounting surface.
• After installation, check back door open/close, lock/unlock operation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-258 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR STAY : Disposal INFOID:0000000007579069

A
1. Fix back door stay (1) using a vise (C).
2. Using hacksaw (A) slowly make 2 holes in the back door stay, in
numerical order as shown in the figure. B
CAUTION:
• When cutting a hole on back door stay, always cover a
hacksaw using a shop cloth (B) to avoid scattering metal C
fragments or oil.
• Wear eye protection (safety glasses).
• Wear gloves.
D
JMKIA3336ZZ

E
A: 20 mm (0.787 in)
B: Cut at the groove.
F

H
JMKIA3609ZZ

BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP


BACK DOOR WEATHER-STRIP : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579070
I

REMOVAL
Pull up and remove engagement with body from weather-strip joint. J
CAUTION:
Never pull strongly on weather-strip.
DLK
INSTALLATION
1. Working from the upper section, align weather-strip center mark with vehicle center position mark and
install weather-strip onto the vehicle.
L
2. For the lower section, insert pad (A) into weather-strip (1), and
then fix the connection point.
M

O
JMKIA5661ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-259 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Align the connecting point (B) of weather-strip (2) to the center
(A) of striker (1), and then install as shown in the figure.

JMKIA5662ZZ

4. Pull weather-strip gently to ensure that there is no loose section.


NOTE:
Check that weather-strip fits tightly in each corner and luggage rear plate.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-260 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
HOOD LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579071

I
JMKIA5899GB

1. Hood lock control cable assembly 2. Hood lock assembly J


: Clip

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)


DLK
: Body grease

HOOD LOCK
L
HOOD LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579072

REMOVAL M
1. Remove front center grille. Refer to EXT-17, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove crash zone sensor. Refer to SR-22, "Removal and Installation".
N
3. Remove hood lock assembly mounting bolts, and then remove hood lock assembly.
4. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly (2) from hood lock
assembly (1).
O

JMKIA5900ZZ

INSTALLATION

Revision: 2011 October DLK-261 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-233, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-262, "Inspection".
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE
HOOD LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579073

REMOVAL
1. Disconnect hood lock control cable assembly from hood lock assembly.
2. Remove fender protector (LH). Refer to EXT-21, "Removal and Installation".
3. Remove hood lock cable clip.
4. Remove hood lock control cable assembly of instrument lower
panel (LH), and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from
fuel filler lid opener lever (1).

JMKIA5901ZZ

5. Remove grommet on the lower dash, and pull the hood lock control cable toward the passenger compart-
ment.
CAUTION:
While pulling, never to damage (peeling) the outside of hood lock control cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never to bend cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.937 in) or more.
• Check that cable is not offset from the positioning grommet,
and apply the sealant to the grommet (at * mark) properly.

PIIB5801E

• Check that hood lock control cable is properly engaged with hood lock.
• After installation, perform hood fitting adjustment. Refer to DLK-233, "HOOD ASSEMBLY : Adjust-
ment".
• After installation, perform hood lock control inspection. Refer to DLK-262, "Inspection".
Inspection INFOID:0000000007579074

NOTE:
If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Check that secondary latch is securely engaged with securely striker from the dead load of the hood
assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-262 2012 JUKE


HOOD LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. Check that primary latch is securely engaged with primary striker when hood assembly is closed [free-fall
from approximately 200 mm (7.874 in) height]. A
CAUTION:
Never free-fall hood assembly from a height of 300 (11.811 in) mm or more.
3. While operating the hood opener carefully, check that the front end of the hood is lifted by approximately B
20 mm (0.787 in) (A). Also, check that the hood opener returns to the original position.

E
JMKIA5673ZZ

1. Primary striker 2. Primary latch 3. Secondary latch F


4. Secondary striker

4. Check that secondary latch is properly engaged with secondary striker [6.8 mm (0.268 in)] (B). G
5. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply
body grease to hood lock.
H
: Grease up point

J
JMKIA5674ZZ

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-263 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579075

JMKIA5883GB

1. Door key cylinder assembly (driver 2. Rear gasket 3. Outside handle bracket
side)
Outside handle escutcheon (passen-
ger side)
4. TORX bolt 5. Key rod (driver side) 6. Door lock assembly
7. Inside handle 8. Outside handle 9. Front gasket
10. Cable clip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579076

REMOVAL
1. Remove front door glass and front door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-16, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-265, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
3. Disengage inside handle cable and lock knob cable from cable clip.
4. Remove outside handle bracket. Refer to DLK-265, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts.
6. Disconnect door lock actuator connector, and then remove door lock assembly.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-264 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal. A
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation. B
• Check door lock cable is properly engaged with outside handle bracket.
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary.
C
: Grease up point

JMKIA5892ZZ

INSIDE HANDLE F
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579077

G
REMOVAL
1. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove inside handle mounting bolt (A). H
3. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han-
dle. I
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5884ZZ DLK
4. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and
then remove inside handle (1).
L

N
JMKIA5885ZZ

INSTALLATION O
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
P
OUTSIDE HANDLE
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579078

REMOVAL
1. Fully close the front door glass.
2. Remove front door finisher. Refer to INT-12, "Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-265 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Remove sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl-tape so that some parts of the butyl-tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused.
4. Disengage lock holder (1), and then separate key rod (3) from
door lock assembly (2).(Driver side)

JMKIA5886ZZ

5. Remove grommet (1) of door side. Loosen, through grommet


hole, TORX bolt (2) that fixes door lock cylinder. (For passenger
side, TORX bolt fixes outside handle escutcheon.)

JMKIA5888ZZ

6. While pulling outside handle, remove door key cylinder assem-


bly (diver side) or outside handle escutcheon (passenger side).

JMKIA0560ZZ

7. While pulling outside handle (1), slide toward rear of vehicle to


remove outside handle.

JMKIA0524ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-266 2012 JUKE


FRONT DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
8. Remove front gasket (1) and rear gasket (2).
A
: Vehicle front

JMKIA5889ZZ

D
9. Slide outside handle bracket toward rear of vehicle to remove.

: Vehicle front
E

G
JMKIA5890ZZ

10. Disconnect outside handle cable (1) from outside handle bracket
(2). H

JMKIA5891ZZ
DLK
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• When installing key rod, rotate key rod holder until a click is felt. L
• Check that door lock cables are normally engaged with inside handle and outside handle.
• After installation, check door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
M

Revision: 2011 October DLK-267 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REAR DOOR LOCK
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579079

JMKIA5893GB

1. Outside handle assembly 2. Rear door sealing screen 3. Door lock assembly
4. TORX bolt 5. Inside handle
: Clip
: Pawl
: Vehicle front
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, in-lb)

: Body grease

DOOR LOCK
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579080

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door glass and rear door lower sash (rear). Refer to GW-20, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove inside handle. Refer to DLK-269, "INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
3. Remove outside handle. Refer to DLK-269, "OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove door lock assembly TORX bolts.
5. Disconnect door lock actuator connector, and then remove door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse TORX bolt. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-268 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
• Check door lock assembly for poor lubrication. Apply body
grease to door lock if necessary. A

: Grease up point
B

JMKIA5892ZZ

D
INSIDE HANDLE
INSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579081

E
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
F
2. Remove upper side of sealing screen.
NOTE:
Cut the butyl tape so that some parts of the butyl tape do not remain on the sealing screen, if the sealing
screen is reused. G
3. Remove inside handle mounting bolt (A).
4. Disengage inside handle (1) from door panel (2) while sliding
inside handle toward vehicle rear, and then separate inside han- H
dle.

: Vehicle front I

J
JMKIA5884ZZ

5. Disengage inside handle cable (3) and lock knob cable (2), and DLK
then remove inside handle (1).

JMKIA5885ZZ
N
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: O
Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.
OUTSIDE HANDLE
P
OUTSIDE HANDLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579082

REMOVAL
1. Remove rear door finisher and rear door corner cover inner. Refer to INT-15, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove rear door sealing screen.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-269 2012 JUKE


REAR DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
3. Rotate stopper (1) upward.
4. Disengage outside handle cable (2), and then remove outside
handle cable from outside handle assembly (3).

JMKIA5894ZZ

5. Remove outside handle assembly mounting bolts (A).

JMKIA5895ZZ

6. Disengage mounting clips using a remover tool (A), and then


remove outside handle assembly.
CAUTION:
Apply protective tape (B) on the door panel to protect the
painted surface from damage.

: Clip

JMKIA5896ZZ

INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
• Never reuse rear door sealing screen. Always replace it with a new one when it is removed.
When installing rear door sealing screen, install it according to the following procedure.
- Put lower portion of rear door sealing screen (1) into inside of
door panel (2).
- Perform positioning according to the following procedure,
and then install rear door sealing screen.
• Align upper portion of rear door sealing screen to hole (A) of
door panel as shown in the figure.
• Align hole of rear door sealing screen to edge (B) of door
panel as shown in the figure.

JMKIA5897ZZ

• Be careful to position outside handle cable normally when installing it. For details, refer to DLK-268,
"Exploded View".
• Check door open/close, lock/unlock operation after installation.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-270 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
BACK DOOR LOCK
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579083

G
JMKIA5714GB

1. Back door lock assembly 2. TORX bolt 3. Back door striker


H
: Do not reuse

: N·m (kg-m, ft-lb)

: Body grease I

DOOR LOCK
J
DOOR LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579084

REMOVAL
DLK
1. Remove the back door lower finisher. Refer to INT-38, "BACK DOOR LOWER FINISHER : Removal and
Installation".
2. Remove back door lock assembly mounting bolts. L
3. Disconnect back door lock connector, and then remove back door lock assembly.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal. M
CAUTION:
After installation, check back door open/close, and lock/unlock operation.
EMERGENCY LEVER N

EMERGENCY LEVER : Unlock procedures INFOID:0000000007579085

O
UNLOCK PROCEDURES
NOTE:
If back door lock cannot be unlocked due to a malfunction or battery discharge, follow the procedures to
unlock back door. P
1. Remove emergency lid. Refer to INT-39, "EMERGENCY LID : Removal and Installation".

Revision: 2011 October DLK-271 2012 JUKE


BACK DOOR LOCK
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
2. From inside the vehicle, rotate emergency lever toward lower
direction and unlock.

JMKIA5616ZZ

Revision: 2011 October DLK-272 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
A
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579086

I
JMKIA5904ZZ

1. Fuel filler lid opener cable 2. Cable protector 3. Fuel filler lid lock assembly J
4. Fuel filler lid assembly 5. Spring 6. Bumper rubber
: Clip
: Do not reuse DLK

FUEL FILLER LID


L
FUEL FILLER LID : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579087

REMOVAL M
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
2. Remove fuel mounting pin (1).
N

JMKIA5717ZZ

3. Remove mounting screws, and then remove fuel filler lid.


INSTALLATION
Note the following items, and install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-273 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
CAUTION:
• After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
• After installation, apply the touch-up paint (the body color) onto the head of the mounting screws.
NOTE:
• The following table shows the specifide values for checking nomal installation status.
• Fitting adjustment cannot be perfomed.
Unit: mm (in)

Clearance Evenness
Fuel filler lid – Body side outer 2.0 – 4.0 (0.079 – 0.157) (-1.0) – (+1.0) [(-0.039) – (+0.039)]
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE
FUEL FILLER OPENER CABLE : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579088

REMOVAL
1. Remove hood lock control cable assembly from instrument lower panel (LH). Refer to DLK-262, "HOOD
LOCK CONTROL CABLE : Removal and Installation".
2. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable (2) from fuel filler lid opener
lever (1).

JMKIA5901ZZ

3. Remove front kicking plate inner (LH) and rear kicking plate inner (LH and RH). Refer to INT-18, "KICK-
ING PLATE INNER : Removal and Installation".
4. Remove dash side finisher (LH). Refer to INT-20, "DASH SIDE FINISHER : Removal and Installation".
5. Remove center pillar lower garnish (LH). Refer to INT-21, "CENTER PILLAR LOWER GARNISH :
Removal and Installation".
6. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
7. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable from fuel filler lid lock assembly. Refer to DLK-275, "FUEL FILLER LID
LOCK : Removal and Installation".
8. Disengage each harness protector (1), and then remove fuel
filler lid opener cable (2).

JMKIA5720ZZ

9. Remove fuel filler lid opener cable fixing clips, and then remove fuel filler lid opener cable.
INSTALLATION
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation.
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-274 2012 JUKE


FUEL FILLER LID OPENER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
FUEL FILLER LID LOCK : Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579089

A
REMOVAL
1. Fully open fuel filler lid.
B
2. Remove luggage side lower finisher (RH). Refer to INT-34, "LUGGAGE SIDE LOWER FINISHER :
Removal and Installation".
3. Rotate and disengage fuel filler lid lock assembly, and then
remove fuel filler lid lock assembly. C
NOTE:
Operation is performed easily when rotating fuel filler lid lock
from passenger room side. D

JMKIA5718ZZ
F
4. Disengage fuel filler lid opener cable (1). Remove fuel filler lid
opener cable while pressing stopper pin (2).
G

I
JMKIA5719ZZ

INSTALLATION J
Note the following item, and install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
After installation, check fuel filler lid assembly open/close, lock/unlock operation. DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-275 2012 JUKE


DOOR SWITCH
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
DOOR SWITCH
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579090

JMKIA2569GB

1. Door switch 2. TORX bolt

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579091

REMOVAL
Remove the TORX bolt (A), and then remove door switch (1).

JMKIA2173ZZ

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-276 2012 JUKE


REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY RECEIVER
A
Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579092

REMOVAL B
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to IP-12, "Removal and Installation".
2. Remove the remote keyless entry receiver (1) mounting bolt (A),
and then remove remote keyless entry receiver. C

JMKIA6084ZZ
F
INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
G

DLK

Revision: 2011 October DLK-277 2012 JUKE


KEYFOB BATTERY
< REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION > [WITHOUT INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM]
KEYFOB BATTERY
Exploded View INFOID:0000000007579093

JMKIA1442ZZ

1. Upper case 2. Key 3. Switch cover


4. Switch rubber 5. Board surface 6. Battery
7. plate 8. Lower case 9. Screw

Removal and Installation INFOID:0000000007579094

REMOVAL
1. Remove screw (9) on the rear of keyfob.
2. Place the key with the lower case (8) facing up. Set a screw-driver wrapped with tape between upper case
(1) and lower case (8) and then separate the lower case (8) from the upper case (1).
CAUTION:
• Do not touch the circuit board or battery terminal.
• The keyfob is water-resistant. However, if it does get wet, immediately wipe it dry.
3. When replacing the circuit board assembly, remove circuit board assembly from the upper case (1).
[Circuit board assembly: Switch rubber (4) + Board surface (5)]
CAUTION:
Do not touch the printed circuits directly.
4. Remove the battery (6) from the lower case (8) and replace it.

Battery replacement : Coin-type lithium battery (CR1620)


CAUTION:
When replacing battery, keep dirt, grease, and other foreign materials off the electrode contact
area.
5. After replacement, fit the lower and upper cases together, part (4), (7) and tighten with the screw.
CAUTION:
After replacing the battery, Be sure to check that door locking operates normally using the keyfob.
Refer to DLK-207, "Component Function Check".

INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Revision: 2011 October DLK-278 2012 JUKE

You might also like